Cessna_Caravan_II F406 POH 1986 Cessna Caravan II
User Manual: Cessna_Caravan_II-F406-POH-1986
Open the PDF directly: View PDF
.
Page Count: 692
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
ZI
uessnal
Information Manual
Cessna Aircraft Company
A
Memb€r ol GAMA
Model406
THIS MANUAL INCORPORATES INFORMATION
ISSUED
THRU REVISION 2 TO THE PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK
AND FAA APPROVED AIBPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL DATED 1
JULY 1986.
COPYRIGHT O !995
C€ssna Aircraft Company
Wichita, Kansas USA
Original lssue - 1 Julv 1986
Dt624-13
MODEL 406
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SECTION
1 GENERAL
2-L
2 LIMITATIONS.......
3-1
3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ... "
4-l
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES .....
o-r
5 PERFORMANCE ..
6-1
6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE
? DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS 7-l
8-1
8 HANDLING,SERVICEANDMAINTENANCE
9-1
9 SUPPLEMENTS ..
Index-1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX .. "
.
.
Contents
Original lssue - 1 JulY 1986
SECTION
MODEL 406
1
GENERAL
SECTION I
GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
..,.....7-2
DRAWING
........1-3
INTRODUCTION
.......1.4
ENGINES
.......... l-4
PROPELLERS
........1-5
FUEL..
....'.....1-6
- oIL .
.... 1-6
L.raxluuM cERTIFICATED wEIGHTS
....,.. 1-8
STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS
CABIN, BAGGAGE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS . . . . . . , . , . . . 1-9
...1-11
SPECIFIC LOADINGS
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ....... 1.11
....... 1-11
General Airspeed Terminology and Symbols
.....1-13
Meteorological Terminology
.......1-14
Power Terminology ....
Engine Controls and Instruments Terminology
'.... 1-15
Airplane Performance and Flight Planning Terminology . . . . 1-16
.....1-1?
Weight and Balance Terminology ...
THREE-VIEW
=r
Originat tssue - 1 July 1986
1-1
SECTION
1
MODEL 406
GENERAL
1.
NORMAL PROPELLER
TIP TO GROUND
CLEARANCE IS 0.85
TOTAL WING AREA
INCLUOING NACELLES AND
FUSELAGE WITHIN THE WING
PLANFORM IS 252.74 SQUABE
I\,IINIMUM TURNING DISTANCE IS
FEET. REFER TO FIGURE
7-t1 FOR ADOITION
INFORMATION.
63.39
*
l\,iAxll\,lUl\,1 HEIGHT OF
AIRPLANE WITH NOSE GEAR
DEPRESSED IS I3.93 FEET.
13.15'*
12.4e'J
Figure l.-1
THRED-VIEW DRAWING
Original lssue
NOTICE
AT THE TIME OF ISSUANCE, THIS INFOR.
MATION MANUAL WAS AN EXACT DUPLI.
CATE OF THE OFFICIAL PILOT'S OPERAT.
ING HANDBOOK AND FAA APPROVED
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL AND IS TO BE
USED FOR GENERAL PURPOSES ONLY.
IT wILL .|GI
U
KEPT CURRENT AND,
THEREFORE, CANNOT BE USED AS A
SUBSTITUTE FOR THE OFFICIAL PILOT'S
OPERATING HANDBOOK AND FAA
APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
INTENDED FOR OPERATION OF THE AIR.
PLANE..
CESSNA AIRCRAFT COMPANY
ORIGINAL ISSUE - 1 JULY 1986
INTRODUCTION
MODEL 406
PERFORI,IANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS
PERFORMANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS
WXIGHT:
. ....
. .. ..
w;ishr
.
.
Meximum Rimo weisht
.
Malisrum Takebff
Miximurn Landine weiel't . .. .
Miiimum zero friet w;rshi
- With zerc wing Locker
SPEED At 8300 Pounds
. .. . .
Power
at
15,000
Manimurn Cruise
RANGE For 4?5 Gallons Usable At 6 7 Pounds per Galon (3183 pounds)
Cruise Power
Msximum
-
-
Payload
Feet
-A-10,000
..
......1027
Feet
At 20,000 Feet
..
..
1281
9435 Pounds
9360 Pounds
9360 Pounds
8500 Pound8
..
216 KTAS
Nauticall{ileg
236 KTAS
NauticalJvlihr
244 KTAS
--If
-Maximum Raose Power
io,000
f""t .........
At 20,000 Feet
... -...
u87 Nauti-,lviler
.....
1652 Neulical Miles
8.54 Hours
180 KTAS
194 KTAS
.
... .
..
. ...
1851 Feet Per Minutr
996 Feet Per Minut€
Above 30,000 Eeet
otal
LANDING
ST
: :. : .. :. :. :. bii,. i;J;d; p".'.uS"l"'FlS
...
. ::::::,idi.s81fi"::ii*t"J"Ltw;i:i
.
.
1f9l . : :. : :.
rit ir.
er
Eneine)
...:..:.,
:
.
..,
9 2
quartg
PRATT and WHITNEY CANADA INC.
urbine enclnes. flat rated to 500 shaft hoBepower at 1900 propeller RPM
sp"i,],
r,ii ;r;i ai,t ii"idi,iii'!, ii"*iii,r", ir,.i,i-br,i
i"ir, i:zb r#10515-2
rr; reserve
Itanee dats includes allowances for start, taxi, tskeoff, (iu,u, desc€nt and 45 '.l1?.at tFe particular cruisp power and altitude. Speeds shown sre ai mid-cmbe weigbt.
The above oerformance fiqures are bssed on lhe indicst€d weights strndqd atomslh€ric
conditions, level hard surfaie dry runways and no wind. They are cal.ulatecl values denved
fmm flighi uesls conduced by'the Ce;na Aireraft Cop.-numerow
-,1 urder carefiilv- dorumenled
factors allecting flight
conaitiois a"d wiu vary with individual airplanes anti
p€dormance.
1 June 1988
I
SECTION
MODEL 406
1
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
This handbook consists of 9 sections and an alphabetical index as
shown on the Contents page. This handbook includes the material
required to be turnished to the pilot by FAR Part 23 and SFAR 41. It
also c-ontgins supplemental data. supplied.b.y Ces^sna Aircraft Company.
Specific information can be rapidly found by referring to the Con-tenis
page tor the appropriate section. then referring to the Table Of Contents
9rl ,ths ,{irs!-pqge of the appropriate section, or by the use of the
Arpnaoelrcal rnoex.
IIOTE
This hand.book includes the rnaterial reouired to
furnished to the pilot by the Federal Auiation
Regulations and additionil inlormation prouid.ed
by Cessna Aircraft Company and constiiutes the
FAA Approued Airplane Flight ManuaL
be
This handbook is not intended to be a zuide for basic flieht instruction or a training rnanual and should not be used as one. lt is not a
substitute. for alequate _and competent flight instruction, knowledge of
current airworthiness directives, applicable federal air regulations or
advisory circulars.
. Assuring the airworthiness of the airplane is the responsibility of the
airplane owner. Determining if the airplane is safe for nisha is the
responsibility of the pilot in command. The pilot is also responsible for
staying within _operating limitations as outlin;d by instrument markings,
placar&. and- this Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
Section 1 of this handbook presents basic airplane data and general
information which will be of value to the nilot.
Original lssue
1-3
SECTION
MODEL 406
1
GENERAL
ENGINES
Number of
Engines:
2
Manufacturer: Pratt and Whitney Canada Inc.
Encine Model
Nu-mber:
Engine Type:
PTOA-112
Free T\rbine,
Reverse Flow Z-Shafb.
Compressor Stages
- and
TVpes: 3 axial stages,
TYPe:
Turbine Stages and Type:
Combustion Chamber
I
centrifugal
stage.
-
Annular
1 stage compression'
1 stage Power
Flat rated at
500 shaft horsePower'
Takeoff and Max Continuous: 500 shaft horsepower'
Maximum Climb and Cruise: 500 shaft horsepower'
Horsepower:
PROPELLERS
Number of
Propellers:
2
PropellerManufacturer: McCauleyAccessoryDivision
Number:
Number of Blades:
Propeller Diameter:
Propelier Tlpe:
Propeller Model
9910535-2
3
7.?5
Feet
-\
Constant speed, full and,auto
leathennq' reversrDle ano
hYdraulicallY actuated.
Propel-terBladeAngle:
(At-30-Inch,StaLion)
a) I eathered 6D.D uegrees
b) Low Pitch 18.5 Degrees
c) Full Reverse -13.5 Degrees
1-4
Original lssue
sEcTtoN
MODEL 406
1
GENERAL
FUEL
FUEL
GRADE (2}
JET A
JET A-1
JET 8
JP,1
JP.4
JP-5
JP-8
*AVrATroN
FOR TAKEOFF
'c
.
SPECtFtC
WEIGHT .
POUNDS PER U.S.
GALLON AT
(1)
6.7
6.7
-54
-54
-54
ASTTV-Dt655
MtL-L-56t6
(3)
MIL-T-5624
MtL-T-5624
MtL-T-831334
MIL-G-5572 AND
COLOR
60.F
ASTM-01655
ASTM.D1655
GASOLINE
{ALL GRADES)
*
FUEL
SPECIFICATIONS
MINIIiIUM FUEL
TEI''PERATURE
-54
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
6.8
6.7
6.0
ASTM.D91O
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
80/87 RED,
lOO GREEN,
lOOLL BLUE
Aviation gasoline (all grades) is approved
for emergency use only.
Refer to Section z foi limidation reouirements anif Se;tion 8 for
fuel servicing information. A record oT total aviation gasoline used
must be recorded in Airplane Engine Maintenance Record.
NATO equivalents of the above fuels may be used.
.AVIATION GASOLINE IS RESTRICTED
TO EMERGENCY USE AND SHALL NOI: BE
USED FOR MORE THAN 150 HOURS IN
ONE OVERHAUL PERIOD.
.A
MIXTURE OF ONE PAR'T AVIATION
GASOLINE AND THREE PARTS OF JET A.
JET A.1, OR JP-s MAY BE USED FOR
EMERGENCY PURPOSES FOR A MAXI.
MUM OF 450 HOURS PER OVERHAUL PE.
RIOD,
.AUXILIABY BOOST PUMP MUST BE ON
WHEN USING AVIATION GASOLINE.
otE
Fuel used. mLlst contain an anti-icinp additiue in
compliance with MIL-l-27686E. Refdr to Section
8 for add.itionaL inforrnation.
Total fuel capacity (U.S. gallons): 481.5
Usable tuel (U.S. gallons): 475.0
Orioinal lssue
t-c
sEcTtoN
1
MODEL 406
GENERAL
otL
Refer to Section 8 for
Total Oil Capacity
(Per
Engine):
list of approved oils and specifrcations.
9.2 U.S. Quarhs
Drain and Refill
Quantity
(Fer Engine):
Approximately 8.4 U.S' Qua*s including oil filter'
Oil Quantity
O*"iiitr" Iianee:
- Fill Lo within 2 quarts of MAX HOT or MAX
COLD (as approprilte) on dipstick' Quart markings
indicate U.S. buart's low if oif is hot. For example, a
dipstick reading of 3 indicates the system ,is within 2
ou-att" of MAX if oil is cold and within 3 quarts of
MAX it ttre oil is hot.
NOTE
To obtain an accurate oil leuel reading, lt is
recommended. the oil leuel be cheched' uithin 10
minutes after engine shutdown while the oil is
or prior to the firs-thot (MAX HOT marhing)
ttisht of th.e duv while the 6iI is cold (MAX
'C1LD
mdrkinil: II rnore than 10 minutes has
since engine shutdown, and engine is
stiil uarm, perforrn an engine dry motoring run
before checking oil leueL.
ela.psed.
MAXIMUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS
Maximum Ramp
Weight:
Weight:
Maximum Landing Weight
Maximum Takeoff
Maximum Zero Fuel
Weisht With Zero
Wing Locker Payload:
9435 Pounds
9360 Pounds
9360 Pounds
8500 Pounds
Maximum Weights a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pounds
each.
in Basgase
Co-o"u?i""nt" b. Avionics Bav - 250 pounds less installed
(Staridard and
optional equipment. RBfer to the loading.
piacard in ih6 airplane avionics baggage bay.
b"iionit t"r"rior
c. Nose Bay - 350 pbunds less installed optional
Pii"enee.
Configrirations): equipment. Refer to the loading placard in the
-
1-6
airPlane nose baggage baY'
1 June 1988
SECTION
MODEL 406
1
GENERAL
Refer to Figure 1-3 - 400
pounds (200 pounds per side). Maximum floor
loading is 75 pounds per square foot.
e. Aft Cabin (Bav B) Refer to Figure 1-3 - 100
pounds (50 pounds per side). Maximurn floor
loading is 75 pounds per squzue foot.
d.
Aft Cabin (Bay A)
Maximum Weights a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pounds
in Baggage
each.
Compartments b. Avionics Bay - 250 pounds less installed op(Cargo Interior
tional equipment. Refer to the loading placard
Configuration): in the airplane avionics baggage bay.
c. Nose Bay - 350 pounds less insta.lled optional
equipment. Refer to the loading placard in the
airplane nose baggage bay.
d. Maximum carso
load in anv 24-inch leneth of
cabin floor is -600 pounds per bay in th! five
cargo bays (Cargo A,B,C,D, & E). If the cargo
has a smooth, reasonable flat lower surface,
load densities of up to 200 pounds per square
foot may be loaded in the cargo bays. Use
pallets or beams to distribute the loads over
all seat rails if adjacent cargo bays are loaded
at a rate of over 75 pounds per square foot.
e. Aft Cabin (Bay A) - 400 pounds (200 pounds
per side). Marimun floor loading is 75 pounds
per square foot.
f. Aft C:abin (Bay B) - 100 pounds (50 pounds
per side). Maxirnum floor loading is 75 pounds
Der souare foot.
g. ilefer- to Section ?, Cargo loading, for add!
tional information.
STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS
Standard Empty Weight:
5033 Pounds
Basic Empty Weight:
(Ootional interior with 8 seat
configuration and standard avionics)
5136 Pounds
Basic Empty Weight:
(Optional interior with 9 seat
configuration and standard avionics)
5160 Pounds
Basic Empty Weight:
(Optional interior with 10 seat
configuration and standard avionics)
5185 Pounds
(Standard interior)
Original lssue
'l-7
SECTION
1
MODEL 406
GENERAL
Basic Emptv
Weisht:
5050 Pounds
Basic Emptv
Weight:
5067 Pounds (28 inch spacing)
5061 Pounds (31 inch spacing)
rOotional-interior with 11 seat
configuration and standard avionics)
(Ontional-interior with 12 seat
co;figuration and standard avionics)
Basic Empty Weight:
(Ootional interior with 14 seat
ioifiguration and standard avionics)
Basic Empty
Weight:
5092 Pounds
4892 Pounds
(Cargo interior)
Maximum Useful Load:
(Standard interior)*
4402 Pounds
Maximum Useful Load:
(Ontional interior with 8 seat
coifiguration and stsndard avionics)*
4299 Pounds
Maximum Usefirl Load:
(Ortional interior with 9 seat
ioifiguration and standard avionics)*
4275 Pounds
Maximum Useful Load:
(Optional intBrior with 10 seat
confrzuration and standard avionics)*
4250 Pounds
Maximum Useful Load:
(Optional interior with 11 seat
confi guration and standard avionics)*
4385 Pounds
Maximum Useful Load:
(Ontional interior with 12 seat
configuration and standard avionics)*
4368 Pounds (28 inch spacing)
43?4 Pounds (31 inch spacing)
Maximum Useful Load:
(Optional interior with 14 seat
ioirfi4rration and standard avionics)*
4343 Pounds
Maximum Useful
(Cargo interior)*
Load:
4543 Pounds
*Based On Maximum RamP Weight.
1-8
Original lssue
SECTION
MODEL 406
1
GENERAL
:ll'
!l*o
-l r-'-i
pi'" ,;n
,_r
49.0"
AND DOOR
PASSENGEB INTEBIOR
NOSE AAGGAGE
VIONICS AAY
PASSENGER INTERIOR
NOSE AAGGAGE
BAY
BAY
AB
r*r_r
43.4
40.0"
WHEEL WELL
VIONICS BAY
AND DOOR
224.9"
PASSENGER INTERIOR
. Ifgufe l-2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
CABIN. BAGGAGE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS
1 June 1987
60852002
60851002
60866036
1-9
sEcTroN
1
MODEL 406
GENERAL
50.6"(47.7' AT FLOOR)
BAY
BAY
56.0" (51.4"AT FLOOR)
(AT FLOOR)
AND DOOR
CABGO INTERIOR
r60.72"-
--------rf*='=Frr
28.3'l I ll
I
L__l_L_==g,
)
BAGGAGE AND CARGO
COMPARTMENT VOLUME . CUBIC FEET
11.0
AVIONICS BAY
15.0
NOSE
10.55
wrNG LOCKER EACH (STD)
31.7
AFT CABIN (BAY A AND B)
cABrN (CARGO A,B,C,D AND E) 201.0
608520o2
608s10q2
6085100r
Figure l-2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
CABIN. BAGG:AGE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS
1
-10
Original lssue
SECTION 1
GENERAL
MODEL 406
SPECIFIC LOADINGS
Wing Loading:
37.03 pounds per square foot.
Power Loading:
9.36 pounds per horsepower.
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
GENERAL AIRSPEED TERMINOLOGY AND SYMBOLS
CAS
Calibrated Airspeed means indicated speed of an air-
G
Acceleration due to gravity.
GS
Ground Speed is the speed of an airplane relative to
the ground.
IAS
plane corrected for position and instrument error.
Calibrated airspeed is equal to true airspeed in standard atmosphere at sea level.
Indicated Airspeed
in the
is the speed of an airplane
as
airsDeed indicator when corrected for
instrument error. iAS values published in this Handbook assume zero instrument error.
shown
KCAS
Calibrated Airspeed expressed in knots.
KIAS
Indicated Airspeed expressed in knots.
KTAS
True Airspeed expressed in knots.
M
Mach Number is the ratio of true airspeed to the
speed of sound.
NM
TAS
Distance expressed in Nautical Miles.
True Airsneed is the airsneed of an aimlane relative
corrected for
altitude, temperatue and compressibility.
to uadisfiirbed air which' is the CAS
Takeoff Decision Speed is the speed at which an
engine failure or other cause is recognized, the distance to continue the takeoff to 50 feet or bring the
airplane to a stop will not exceed the scheduled field
length distance. The first action required to stop or
continued is assumed to have been initiated by Vr.
Takeoff Safety Speed is the speed at 50 feet above
the runway surface as demonstrated in flight during
takeoff with one enghe inoperative.
Original lssue
1-11
SECTION
1
MODEL 406
GENERAL
Maneuvering Speed is the maximum speed at which
application of full available aerodynamic control will
not overctress the airplane.
V""
Critical Ensine Failure Speed is the speed at which
the ensine was failed during certification flight testins to ?etermine accelerateil stop and accelerated go
distances.
Vrn
V""
VLo
V"co
Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the highest speed
permissible with wing flaps in a prescribed extended
position.
Maximum Landins Gear Extended Speed is the
maximum speed aiwhich an airplane can be safely
flown with the landing gear extended.
Maximum Landins Gear Operating Speed is the
maximum speed ai which the landing gear can be
safely exteniied or retracted.
Air Minirnurr Control Speed is the rninirnum flight
speed at which the airplane is directionally and lateiallv controllable as determined in accordance with
Fedeial Aviation Regulations. Airplane certfication
conditions include one engine becoming- inoperative
and feathered; not more than a 5-degree bank toward
the ooerative encine; takeoff power on operative engine: ianding geir up; flaps in ta.keoff position; and
most cntlcal cent€r-ol-gTavl[y.
V,ro/M"o
Maximum Operatins Limit Speed is the speed limit
that may n;t be aeliberat€ly exceeded in normal
flight oplrations. V is expresied in knots and M in
Mach Number.
vR
Rotation Speed is the speed at which rotation is
initiated duiine taleoff to attain the V, clinb speed
at or before a Leight of 50 feet above runway surface
has been reached.
vs
Vso
1-12
Stalline Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at
which Ihe-aimlane is controllable.
Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at
Stalline
-th6
is controllable in the landing
which
airplane
confizuration.
Original lssue
SECT'ON
MODEL 406
VssB
vx
1
GENERAL
Intentional One Engine Inoperative Speed is a minimum soeed. selected bv the manufacturer, for intenLionally rendering one engine inoperative, in flight,
for pilot training.
Best Anele-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed which
delivers ihe greatest gain of altitude in the short€st
possible horizontal distance.
Vts"
One Encine Inoperative Best Angle-of-Climb Speed
a-irspeed which delivers the $eatest gain of
altitude in the shortest possible horizontal distance
is the
Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed which delivers the greatest gain in altitude in the shortesi
possible time.
V"s.
One Ensine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is
the airspeed which delivers the greatest gain in altitude in the shortest possible time.
METEOROLOGICAL TERMINOLOGY
'c
Temperature expressed in degrees Celsius.
"F
Temperature expressed in degrees Faluenheit'
Indicated
The number actuallv read from an altimeter when
the barometric subsiale has been set to 29.92 inches
Pressure
-
Altitude
of mercury (1013.2 millibars).
IOAT
Indicated OuLside Air Temperature is the temperature indicated on the pilot's outside air temperature
indicator. The indication is not adjusted for instrument error or temperature compressibility effects.
ISA
Int€rnational Standard Atmosphere in which:
(1) The air is a dry perfect gas;
(2) The temperature at sea level is 15 degrees
(3)
(4)
'
Celsius;
The pressure at sea level is 29.92 inches Hg.
( 1013-.2 millibars);
The rcmoerature sradient from sea level to the
altitude irt ,rhich-the temperature is -56.6 degrees Celsius. is -1.98 degrees Celsius per 1000
Ieei.
OAT
Original lssue
Outside Air Temperature is the free air static t€mDerature, obtained either from inflight t€mperature
indications or ground meteorological sources adjusted
for instrumentirror and compressibility effects.
1-13
SECTION
1
MODEL 406
GENERAL
Pressure
Altitude
Station
Altitude neasured from staldard sea-level pressure
(29.92 inches Hg.) by a pressure or barometric altimeter. It is the indicated pressure altitude corrected
for position and instrument error. In this handbook,
altimeter instrument erroni are assumed to be zero.
Actual atmospheric pressure at freld elevation.
Pressure
Temperature
Compressibility
Effects
An error in the indication of temperature caused by
airflow over the temperature probe. The error varies,
depending on altitude and abspeed.
The wind velocities recorded as variables on the
charts of this handbook are to be understood as the
headvind or tailwind components of the reported
Wind
wrn0s.
POWER TERMINOLOGY
Auto Feather
A systen designed to automatically reduce drag of an
inoperative engine by moving the propeller to feather.
Critical
Altitude
The maximum altitude at which in standard temperature it is possible to maintain a specified power.
Cruising Climb
Power
The power recommended to operate the airplane in a
cmise climb (a continuous gradual clinb) profile.
ITT
Interturbine Temperature.
Flameout
Unintentional loss of combustion chamber flame during operation.
Flat Rated
Constant horsepower over a specific altitude range.
Flight Idle
The power required to run an engine, in flight, at the
lowest speed that will ensure satisfactory engine operation and airplane handling characteristics.
Power
Gas Generator
RPM
(Ns)
Ground Idle
Power
1-14
Indicates the percent of gas generator rpm based
on a figure of 100 percent at 37,500 rpm.
The power required to run an engine on the ground,
as slowly as possible, yet sufficient to ensure satisfactory engine, engine accessory, and airplane operation
with a minimum of thrust.
Original lssue
.EETL"$I
MODEL 406
Hot Start
Maximum
Continuous
Power
Maximum
Cruise Power
^
An engine start, or attempted start, which results in
ITT
exceeding 1090 degrees Celsius.
The oower developed at the maximum continuous
torqui limit, ITT jimit: or Ng limit. This is equivalent to takeoff power.
The power developed at the maximurn cruise torque
limit, ITT limit or Ng limit.
Power T\rrbine
RPM (Nf)
Indicates the percent of power turbine speed based
on a figure of 100 percent at 33,000 rpm and a
propeller speed (No) of 1900 rpm.
Propeller RPM
Indicates propeller speed in rpm.
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute.
Reverse Thrust
The thrust produced when the propeller blades
rotated past flat pitch into the Beta iange.
SHP
Shaft horsepower means the power delivered at the
Takeoff Power
The maximum power permissible for takeoff.
Torque
A measurement that
output of the engine.
Windmill
Propeller rotation from airstream inputs.
(Ne).
are
propeller shaft.
is proportional to the power
ENGINE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS TERMINOLOGY
Beta Mode
Ensine operational mode in which propeller blade
pitih is cbntrolled by the cockpit power lever. May
be used during ground operations only.
Lever
Cockpit Control lever which sets the fuel control in
eithei "RUN" or "CUTOFF".
Gas Generator
Governor
Regulates the gas generator to the speed selected by
the cockpit power lever.
ITT
Interturbine temperature gage displaying air temperature between the cornpressor turbine and power
turbine.
Fuel Control
Gage
Original lssue
1-15
SECTION 1
GENEBAL
MODEL 406
Flyweight operated fuel met€ring device, housed in
the propeller governor. lt prevents engine overspeed
in the event of a malfunction of the propeller gov-
Overspeed
Governor
ernor.
Propeller
Governor
Regulates the RPM of the propeller by increasing or
decreasing the propeller pitch through a pitch change
mechanism in the propeller hub.
Control
Lever
Cockpit lever used to set gas generator Bpeed. During
Beta node the power lever controls propeller blade
Power
Propeller
Lever
Fropeller
Overspeed
Governor
Tachometer
Torque
Meter
angle and speed.
Cockpit lever used to set propeller RPM.
A gearbor mounted governor which dumps propeller
oil
pressure to prevent engine danage should the
propeller governor fail.
Indicates the speed
propeller (Np).
of the gas generator (Ng) or
The instrument that indicates the torque output of
tt)e englne gear Dox.
AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE AND FLIGHT PLANNING
TERMINOLOGY
Accelerate-Go The
Distance
distance required to accelerate an airplane to Vt
and assuming pilot recognizes an engine failure at Vt,
continues takeoff on the remaining engine
height of 50 feet.
to
a
Accelerate-Stop The
Distance
Aerobatic
Maneuver
distance required to accelerate an airplane to V1
and assuming pilot recognizes an engine failure at Vr,
brings the airplane to a stop.
An intentional maneuver involving an abrupt change
of an airplane's attitude, an abnornal attitude, or
abnormal acceleration, not necessary for normal
flieht.
Balked
Landing A balked
Balked
Landing The minimum
Transition
Speed
1-1 6
landing is. an aborted landing.(i.e., all en-
gines go-around in the landing configuration).
speed at which a transition to a
balked landing climb should be attempted (from
5O-foot obstacle height).
Original lssue
SECTION
MODEL 406
Climb
Gradient
1
GENERAL
The demonstrated ratio of the change in height during a portion of a climb to the horizontal distance
traversed in the same time interval.
Demonstrated The demonstrated crosswind velocity is the velocity
Crosswind
Velocity
of the crosswind component for which adequate control of the airplane iiuring takeoff and landing was
actually demonstrated during certification tests. The
value ihown is not considered to be limiting. This
value is not an aerodynamic limit for the airplane.
Maneuverins
Fuel
Maneuvering fuel is the usable fuel as shown in
Section 2 foi all airplane confrgurations, provided the
roaximum side slip duration is not exceeded.
Maximum
Effective
The maximum anount of braking pressure that can
be applied to the toe brakes without locking the
Braking
wheels.
MEA
Minimum enroute IFR altitude.
Route
A part of a route' Each end of that part is identified
Secment
bvi (1) a geographical location; or (2) a point at
wiich a d"frniie ridio frr can
be established'
WEIGHT AND BALANCE TERMINOLOGY
Arm
The horizontal distance from the reference datum to
the center-of-gravlty (C.G.) of an item.
Basic Empty
Standard empty weight plus installed optional equip-
Weight
menf,.
Center-of-Grav- The point at which an airplane would balance if
suspended. Its distance from the reference daturr is
itv
fouird by dividing the total moment by the total
weight of the airPlane
C.G. Arm
The arm obtained by adding the airplane's individual
moments and dividGg the sum by the total weight.
C.G. Limits
The ertreme center-of-sravitv locations within which
the airplane must be oplratcil at a given weight.
Jack Point
One of the three points on the airplane designed to
rest on a jack.
MAC
The Mean Aerodvnamic Chord of a wing is
Original lssue
the
chord of an imaginary airfoil which throughout the
flight range will f,ave the same force vectors as those
of the wing.
1-17
SECTION
1
MODEL 406
GENERAL
Maximum weight approved for the landing touch-
Maximum
Landing
Weight
oown.
Maximum
Ramp Weight
Maximum weieht aDDroved for sround maneuver. (It
includes weighl of siirt, taxi anil run-up fuel.)
Maximum
Takeoff Weight
Maximum weight approved for the start of the
Maximum Zero
Fuel Weight
Maximum weight exclusive of usable fuel.
Moment
The product of the weight of an item multiplied by
its arm. (Moment divided by a constant is used to
simplifu balance calculations by reducing the number
of digits.)
Payload
Weight of occupants, cargo and baggage.
Reference
An imaeinarv vertical nlane from which
Datum
Residual Fuel
takeoff run.
a.ll horizontal distinces-are measuied for balance purposes.
The undrainable fuel remaining when the airplane is
defueled in a specfic attitude by the normal means
and procedures specified for draining the tanks.
Standard
Empty Weight
Weight of a standard airplane including unusable
fuel, full operating fluide and full oil.
Station
A location along the airplane fuselage given in termg
of distance from the reference datum.
Tare
Tare is the weight of the chocks, blocks, stands, etc.
used when weighing an airplane, and is included in
the scale readings. Tare is deducted from the scale
reading to obtai; the actual (net) airplane weight.
Unusable Fuel
Fuel remainins after fuel runout tests have been
completed in iccordance with governmental regulations.
Usable Fuel
Fuel available for flight planning.
Useful Load
Difference between ramp weight and the basic empty
weight.
1-18
Original lssue
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
sEcTloN
2
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS
POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS
POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
WEIGHT LIMITS .
CENTER-OF-GRAVITY LIMITS
MANEUVER LIMITS .
FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS
FLIGHT CREW LIMITS
KINDS OF OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT LIMITS '
FUEL LIMITATIONS . .
MAXIMUM OPERATING ALTITUDE LIMIT .
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITS
MAXIMUM PASSENGER SEATING LIMITS .
PLACARDS
Original lssue - 1 JulY 1986
2-4
2-6
2-6
2- 10
2-tl
2-77
2-73
2-t3
2-13
2-13
2-76
2-16
2-76
2-r7
2-18
2-1 (2-2 btank)
SFAF 41
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Section 2 presents the operating limitations, the significance of such
limitations, instrument markings, iolor coding and basic placards necessarv for the safe operation oi ihe airplane,- its powerplants' standard
svsiems and standaid equipment. The li.rnitations included in this section and Section 9 are aiprbved by the Federal Aviation Administration.
Observance of these opeiating limitations is required by Federal Aviation
Regulations.
Oneration
in
countries other than the United States may require
or performance data in ap-
observance of other limitations, procedures
plicable supplements.
NOTE
oRefer to Sectinn I for arnended linitations for
airplanes equipped with specific optianal sys'
terns.
OThe airspeed.s listed in the Airspeed, Limitations chari (Figure 2-1) and Airspeed Indicator
Marhings charl (Fieurb 28) are'based on Airspeed, Calibration d'ata shoun in Section 5.
Original lssue
2-3
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
Airspeed limitations and their operational significance are shown in
Figure 2-1.
cAs
tAs
163
162
DO NOT MAKE ABRUPT CONTROL
MOVEMENTS ABOVE THIS SPEED.
MAXII\,!UM FLAP EXTENDED
SPEED
T.O, AND APPR POSITIONS
LAND POSITIONS
VFE (KNOTS)
200
200
r80
180
DO NOT EXCEED THIS SPEED WITH
THE GIVEN FLAP SETTING.
MAXIMUM GEAR OPERATING
180
180
OO NOT EXIENO OR RETRACT
LANDING GEAR ABOVE THIS SPEED.
180
180
DO NOT EXCEED THIS SPEED
WITH LANDING GEAR EXTENDED.
91
90
THIS IS THE MINII\4UM FLIGHT
SPEED AT WHICH THE AIRPLANE
IS CONTROLLABLE WITH ONE
ENGINE INOPERATIVE AND A
5 DEGREES BANK TOWARDS THE
MANEUVEFING SPEED
9360 POUNDS AT SEA LEVEL
IREFER TO FIGURE 2'2)
v; {KNoTS)
REMARKS
Vse (KNOTS)
MAXIi/tUM GEAR EXTENDED
VLE (KNOTS)
AIR I\.4INI[4UM CONTROL
SPEED WITH WING
FLAPS - T.O.
Vucr(KNOTS)
NOTE
OPERATIVE ENGINE.
Buffet can be encountered
os hieh as 95 KIAS uith
airplane at matimum
taieofl weight and the
wing flaps in the UP
Do$ition. FLaps UP
'taheof[
is noi approved.
DO NOT EXCEEO THIS SPEED OR
MACH NUMBER IN ANY OPERATION.
MAXIMUM OPERATING
LIMIT SPEED
VMO {KNOTS)
rlrMo (MACH NUMBER)
230
0.52
229
0.52
AS INDICATED BY BABEER POLE
IRED AND WHITE NEEDLE).
ON AIRSPEED INDICATOR,
Figure 2-1
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
2-4
Original lssue
SECTION 2
LlirtlTATIONS
MODEL 406
CON0lTl0NSl
1. Landino qear - UP
2. Wing l6pis - UP
WEIGHT
- POUNOS
P rs
ru
o
tFf
't0
120
140
SPEED (VA)
160
- KIAS
180
EXAMPLE:
Weioht - 9000 Pounds
Altitlde - 10.000 Feet
Maximum Maneuvering Spe€d - 162 KIAS
Ficure 2-2
MAXIMUM MANEUVERING SPEEDS
Original lssue
z-a
sEcTloN 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS
Airspeed indicator marking and their color significance are shown in
Figure 2-3.
IAS VALUE'
SIGNIFICANCE
MARKING
OR RANGE
RED RADIAL
90 KNOTS
AIR MINIMUM CONTROL SPEED WITH WING FLAPS IN THE
T.O. POS|T|ON.
WHITE ARC
75 TO 180
OPEBATING SPEED RANGE WITH WING FLAPS IN LAND
POSITION. LOWEB LIMIT IS MAXIMUI\,i WEIGHT STALLING
SPEED IN LANDING CONFIGURATION. UPPEF LII/IT
IS MAXIMUM SPEED PERMISSIBLE WTH FLAPS IN LAND
WIDE
NARROW
75 TO 94.5
94.5 TO 180
POStTtON.
THE TRANSITION POINT FFOM WIDE TO NARROW ARC IS
THE STALL SPEED WITH WING FLAPS IN UP POSITION.
BLUE ARC
104 TO 108
KNOTS
OPERATING SPEED RANGE WITH ONE ENGINE
INOPERATIVE EEST RATE.OF.CLIMB SPEED,
STANDARD DAY CONDITIONS AND MAXIMUM GROSS
WEIGHT. LOWER LIMIT IS SPEED AT 15,OOO FEET,
UPPER LIMIT IS SPEED AT SEA LEVEL,
RED AND WHITE
BARBER POLE
229 KNOTS
0.52 MACH
MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED. BARBER POLE INOICATES
229 KIAS UNTIL REACHING APPROXIMATELY 22,OOO
FEET. ABOVE THIS ALTITUDE, IT WILL INDICATE
CONSTANT 0,52 MACH.
Figure 2-3.
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS
POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS
Engines: 2
Engine Manufacturer: Pratt and Whitney Canada Inc.
Engine Model Number: PT6A-112
Engine Operating Limits: Refer to Figure 2-4.
Number of
Starting Cycle Limitations:
a, External Power
Or Battery Start - 30 seconds On 60 seconds Off,
- 30 seconds On 60 seconds Ofi
- 30 seconds On 30 minutes Off. Repeat the
above cvcle as required.
Minimum Engine Torque
For Takeoffi
1-O
Refer to Fizure 5-10 for minimum value for
which takeoff oerformance can be obtained.
Original lssue
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
ENGINE OPESATING LIMITS
GAS
iraxtmuM GENERATOR PROPELLER
POWEN
SETTING
RPM
FT.LBS
ITT'C
0)
RPM
Np
irf
otL
olL
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
PSIG
(3)
(7)
TAKEOFF AND
MAXIMUM
1900
80
to 100
10 to 99
1900
600 {4)
80
to 100
10 to 99
101.6
1815
80 to 100
102.6
2090
1382
725
101.6
1382
't477\4)
695
'|
1382
725
825
CONTINUOUS
MAXIMUM
CLIMB/
cRUrsE (8)
01.6
1
40 MtN.
685
40 to 99
0t099
(s)
ACCELERATTON (6)
1900
0to99
40
1090 (6)
STARTING
Mlr,l.
I
Maximum permissible sustained torque is 1477 foot-pounde. Ne must be set
so as not to exceed engine operating limitations. Refer to PLACARDS this section for maximum torque table.
(2) For every 10 degrees Celsius (18 degrees Fahrenheit) below -30 degrees
Celsius (-22 degrees Fahrenheit) ambient lempemture, reduce maxbnum
(l
allowable N" by
).2
percent.
(3) Normal oil pressure is 80 to
RPM (72 percent) with oil
(4)
(5)
1 c,
100 PSIG at gas generator speeds above 27,000
temperature between 60 to 70 degrees Celsius
(140 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit). Oil pressures below 80 PSIG are undesirable and should be tolerated only for ihe completion of the flight,
preferably at reduced power setting. Oil pressures below normal should be
ieporred as an engine riiscrepancy a-nd shoutd be conected before next flight.
Oil pressures below 40 PSIG are unsafe and require that either the etrgine
be ihut down or a landing be made as soon as pbssible using the minimum
power required to sustain flight.
If maximum torque is used, \ must be set so aB not to exceed engine
operating limitations.
Reverse powe! ooeration is limit€d to one minute.
Th""" uutues are time limited to two seconds.
(?) For increased oil service life, an oil temperature between 74 to 80 degrees
Celsius (165 to 176 degrees Fahrenheit) is recommended. A minimum oil
(8)
'
temperature of 55 degrees Celsius (130 degrees Fahrenheit) is recommended
for fuel heater operation at takeoff power.
Maximum cluige power limits vary with altitude and temperature. For
maximum cruise power limits lefer 6 MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER trbleo
in Section 5.
l{OtE
100 percent Ns (2) is 37,500
RPM
Figur€ 2-4
ENGINE OPERATING LIMITS
Original lssue
2-7
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
Fuel Specification and Approved Fuel Additives:
MINIMUM FUEL
FUEL
SPECIFICATIONS
GRADE (2)
JET A
JET A.1
JET B
ASTM.D1655
ASTM-D1655
ASTM.D1655
JP.1
MtL-L-56t6
JP.4
lL-T-5624
MtL-T-5624
M tL-T-831 33A
MI1.G.5572 AND
TEMPERATURE
FOR TAKEOFF .
l?t
Jt,-5
JP-8
*AVrATroN
(3)
'c
SPECtFtC
WEIGHT POUNDS PER U.S.
600F
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
-31
-31
-54
-54
-54
-31
-31
-54
COLORLESS
COLOBLESS
6.5
6.8
6.7
6.0
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
80/87 RED,
1OO GREEN,
ASTM.D91O
GASOLINE
(ALL GRADES)
COLOR
GALLON AT
(1)
l OOLL BLUE
* Aviation easoline (all srades) is approved for emergency use only. A
record of total aviation gaioline used must be recorded in the Airplane
Engine Maintenance Record.
(l)
(2)
Minimum sLarting t€mperature is thal given or the mini-mum allowable oil temperature. -40 degrees Celsius (-40
degrees Fahrenheit) whichever is warmer.
Refer to Section 8 for fuel servicing information.
.AVIATION GASOLINE IS RESTRICI| ED
TO EMERGENCY USE AND SHALL NOT BE
USED FOR MORE THAN 150 HOURS IN
ONE OVERHAUL PERIOD.
.A
MIXTURE OF ONE PART AVIATION
GASOLINE AND THREE PARTS OF JET A,
JET A-1. JP-1. or JP-\ MAY BE USED FOR
EMERGENCY PUiPOSES FON A MAXIMUM OF 450 HOURS PER OVERHAUL PERIOD.
.AUXILIARY BOOST PUMP MUST BE ON
WHEN USING AVIATION GASOLINE.
(3)
using aviation gasoline the maximum fuel and am' When
bient tempirature foi takeoff is 32 degrees Celsius (90
degrees Fahrenheit).
a. NATO equivalents of the above fuels may be used.
b. Fuel used must contain anti-icing fuel additive in
compliance
with MIL-I-276868.
2-8
Original lssue
MODEL 406
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
Fuel Additive:
The fuel used in the aimlane must have an anti-icine additive in
compliance with MIL-I-2?6'86E, incorporated or added into the fuel
during refueling.
JP.4 AND JP-, FUELS PER M1L.7,5624
AND JP,8 FUEL PER MIL-T-831334 CONI:AIN THE CORRECT PREMIXED qUANTITY OF AN APPROVED TYPE OF ANTIICING FUEL ADDITIVE AND NO ADDITIONAL ANTI-ICE COMPOUNDS SHOULD
BE ADDED.
Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether (EGME) compound in compliance
with MIL-I-27686E. if added. must be carefullv mired with the fuel in
the tank in concentrations not to exceed 0.ls'percent by volume. The
minimum EGME concentration within the fuel tank is 0.035 percent bv
volume.The minimum EGME concentration for fuel beine added to th-e
fuel tank is 0.060 percent by volume.
REFER TO SECTION 8 FOR PROPER
HANDLING AND SEBVICING OF
EGME.
.
MIXING OF THE EGME COMPOUND WITH
THE FUEL IS EXTREMELY IMPONTANT
BECAUSE CONCENTRATION /N
OF THAT BECOMMENDED (0.15 PERCENT
'XC'SS
BY VOLUME MAXIMUM) WILL RESULT IN
DETRIMENTAL EFFECTS TO THE FUEL
I:ANKS, SUCTI AS DETERIORATION OF
PROTECTIVE PRIMER AND SEALANTS
AND DAMAGE TO O-RINGS AND SEA'S IN
THE FUEL SYSTEM AND ENGINE COMPO.
NEN?S. USE ONLY BLENDING EqUIPMENT THAT IS RECOMMENDED BY THE
MANUFAC'| UREN TO OBTAIN PROPER
PROPORTIONING.
Original lssue
z-Y
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
Preflight Checks:
a. The overspeed governor check shall be performed: before the
fusi flisht of the dav, if there is an indication of malfunction,
after erigine control syst€m maintenance, or if adjustment has
been made.
checked before each flight and must be
operative for takeoff.
Oil Specification:
a. Refer to Section 8 for list of approved oils and specifications.
b. When addine oil, service the engines with the type and brand
which is currently being used in the engines. Do not mir tJpes
or brands of oils.
c. Tvpe II oils in compliance with Pratt and Whitney Canada Inc,
b. Autofeather shall be
Soicification PWA 521.
Canada- Inc., Service
Bulletin Numb.-er 12001 and all revisions or supplements thereto, must be used.
d. Oi conforming to Pratt and Whitney
Propellers:
a. Number of Propellers:
b.
2
Manufacturer: McCauley Accessory Division of Cessna Aircraft
Company.
Cessna Part Number: 9910535-2
d. Number of Blades: 3
Diameter: 7.?5 Feet
f. Maximum Operating Speed: 1900 RPM
Blade Angle: (At 30-Inch Station)
(1) Feathered 85.5 degrees
(2) Low Pitch 18.5 degrees
(3) Full Reverse -13.5 degrees
h Flight operation with power levers retarded below FLIGHT
IDLE are prohibited.
POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Torque Indicators:
a. 1382 Foot-Pounds Maximum Takeoff And Climb Torque
1900 RPM (Yellow Radial)
b. 0 to 1477 Foot-Pounds (Green Arc)
c. 14?? Foot-Pounds Maximum Cruise Torque
At
At
1600 RPM
(Red Radial)
ITT Indicators:
a. 725 degrees Celsius (Red Line)
b. 0 degrees to 695 degrees Celsius (Green Arc)
c. 695 degrees to 1090 degrees Celsius (Yellow Arc)
d. 1090 degrees Celsius (Red Triangle)
2-'10
Original lssue
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
Gas Generator RPM Indicators:
a. 101.6 percent RPM (Red Line)
b. 52 percent to 101.6 percent RPM (Green
Arc)
Propeller RPM Indicators:
a.
b.
1900 RPl"{ (Red Line)
1600 to 1900 RPM (Green Arc)
Oil Pressure Indicators:
a. 40 and 100 PSI (Red Radial)
b. 40 to 80 PSI (Yellow Arc)
c. 80 to 100 PSI (Green Arc)
Oil Temperature Indicators:
a. -40 degrees and *99 degrees Celsius (Red Radial)
b. *10 degrees to i-99 degrees Celsius (Green Arc)
c. -40 degrees to + 10 degrees Celsius (Yellow Arc)
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Instrument Air:
a. Red Line: 2.25 PSI
b. Green Lrc: 2.25 to 2.75 PSI
Oxygen Pressure:
a. Yellow Arc: 0 to 300 PSI
b. Green Arc: 1550 to 1850 PSI
c. Red Line: 2000 PSI
Propeller Deice Ammeter;
a. Individual indicators will be marked LEFT or RIGHT.
b. White arc operating range will be marked with the high end of
the scale marked with HI.
c. A normal operating green arc will be provided between the HI
and LOW ends of the white arc operating range.
^
wErcHT LrMlrs
Maximum Ramp Weight: 9435 Pounds
Maximum Takeoff Weight:
The takeoff weight is limited by the most restrictive of the follow- |
ing requirements:
a. Maximum Takeoff Weight: 9360 Pounds.
b. Maximum takeoff weight to achieve takeoff climb requirements
from Figure 5- 11.
c. Maximum takeoff weight as permitted by field length from
Fizure 5-12.
1 June 1987
2-11
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
d. Maximum takeoff weight as permitted by the
demonstrated
brake energy limits from Figure 5-13.
Maximum Landing Weight:
The landing weight is limited by the most restrictive of the follow-
ing requirements:
a. Maximum Landing Weight: 9360 Pounds.
b. Landing field length required from Figure 5-35.
lMarimum Zcro Fuel Weight with Zero Wing
I Locker Payload: 8500 Pounds
Maximurn Weights In Baggage Compartments:
(Standard and Optional Passenger Interior Confrgurations)
a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pounds each.
b. Avionics Bay - 250 pounds less installed optional equipment.
Nose Bay - 350 pounds less installed optional equipnent.
pounds (200 Pounds Per Side)' Maxid. Aft Cabin (Bay
- A) - 400
mum floor loading is 75 pounds per square
foot.
Aft Cabin (Bay B) - 100 pounds (50 Pounds Per Side). Maximum floor loading is 75 pounds per square
foot.
Maximum Weights in Baggage Compartments (Cargo Interior)
a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pountls each.
b. Avionics Bay - 250 pounds less installed optional equipment.
c. Nose Bay - 350 pounds Iess installed optional equipment.
d. Maximum cargo load in any 24-inch length of cabiq flo-or is 600
A, B, C, D and
oounds ner balv in the five careo bavs (Careo
-fXat
lower surface,
reasonable
has
a
smoothl
E). If the carlo
load densities -of up to 200 pounds per square foot -may be
loaded in the cargo bays. Use pallets oi beams to dbtribute the
Ioads over all seit raiis if adjicent cargo bays are loaded at a
rate of over 75 pounds per square foot.
Aft Cabin (Bay A) - 400 pounds (200 Pounds Per Side)' Marimum floor loading is ?5 pounds per square
foot.
f. Aft Cabin (Bay B) - 100 pounds (50 Pounds Per Side). Maxr
mum floor loading is ?5 pounds per square
foot.
2-12
1 June 1988
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
CENTER.OF-GRAVITY LIMITS (GEAR EXTENDED)
a. Aft Limit 180.28 inches aft of reference datum (32.00% MAC)
at 9435 pounds or less.
b. Forward Limit:172.42 inches aft of reference tlatum
(19.58%
MAC) at 9360 pounds or less and 166.99 inches
aft of reference datum (11.00% MAC) at 6500
pounds or less with straight line variation between these points.
c. Refer to Section 6 for loading schedule. The reference datum is
100 inches forward of the aft face of the fuselage bulkhead
forward of the rudder Dedals. The mean aerodttmamic chord
(MAC) is 63.245 inchei in length. The leadin! edge of the
MAC is 160.04 inches aft of the reference datun.
MANEUVER LIMITS
This is a normal category airplane. Aerobatic maneuven, including
spins, are prohibited.
FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS
Inflight:
a. Wing Flaps - UP: -1.44 to +3.6 G at Maximum Gross Weight.
b. Wing Flaps - TAKEOFF thru LAND positions, 0.0 to *2.0 G
at Maximum Gross Weisht.
FLIGHT CREW LIMITS
Minimum flight crew is one pilot with the required equipment installed and operational.
.\
KTNDS OF OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT
LlMlrS
\rFR, and day and night
This aimlane is equipped for day VFR, night
-placard
reflects the limits
limitations
applicable at the time of Airworthiness Certilicate issuance.
IFR operaiions. Th6 irirerating
The following equipment lists identify the systems and equipment
upon which type certification for each kind of operation was predicated.
items must be installed and operable for
These system-s- and equipment
-operation
indicated unless an FAA Approv,ed
the pariicular kind 6f
Minihum Equipment Liit is in effect. The pilot is responsible for
determining fhe airworthiness of his airplane Tor each flilht and for
assuring compliance with current operating regulations. The number in
( ) indicates more than one required per airplane.
Original lssue
2-1il
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
DAY VFR:
1. Pilot Instruments
a. Airspeed Indicator (Sensitive)
*b. Altimeter Indicator
c. Magnetic Direction Indicator
2. Annunciators (Lights)
a. Oil Pressure (2)
b. Wing Overheat (2)
c. Fuel Pressuie Low (2)
d. Auxiliary Boost Pump On (2)
e. Battery Overheat
f. Hydraulic Pressure On
g. Autofeather Arm (2)
h. Air Duct Overheat
i. Landing Gear Position Indicator
j. Fuel Filter Bypass (2)
k. Inertial Seperator (2)
l. Fuel Transfer Pump (2)
3. Engine Instruments
a. Torque Indicator (2)
b. Propeller Tachometer (2)
c. ITT Indicator (2)
d. Gas Generator Tachometer (Nr) (2)
e. Oil Pressure Gage (2)
f. Oil Temperature Gage (2)
4. Miscellaneous Indicators
a. Fuel Quantity Gage (2)
b. Voltmeter
c. Ammeter {2)
d. Outside Air Temperature Gage
5.
Systerns
a. Auxiliary Boost Pump
b. Firewall Shutoff (2)
c. Generator (2)
d. Inertial Separator (2)
e. Stall Warning
f. Aileron Trim
g. Rudder Trim
*
2-14
(2)
When a servoed altimeter
altimeter is also required.
is installed a functioning
pneumatic
Original lssue
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
h. Elevator Trim (Manual Only)
i.
j.
Engine Ignition (2)
Engine Fire Detection (2)
k. Hydraulic Pumps(2)
l.
Flap
m. Overspeed Governor
n. Autofeather (2)
(2)
6. Miscellaneous Items
a. Seat Belts (Each Occupant)
b. Shoulder Harnesses (Front Seat(s))
c. Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA
Approved Airplane Flight
Manual
d. Pilot's Abbreviated Checklist (Single Pilot Operation Only)
e. Headset and Boom Mountcd Microphone (Single Pilot Opera-
tion Only)
f. Exit Sign (3)
NIGHTVFR:
1. All Equipment Required for DAY VTR
2. Instrument Lights (As Required)
3. Navigation Lights (3)
4. Strobe Lights (2)
IFR:
1. All Equipment Required for DAY \rFR
2. All Equiprrent Required for NIGHT VFR (If a Night Flisht)
3. Pilot's Instruments
a. Attitude Indicator (Gyro Stabilized)
b. Directional Indicator (Gyro
c. Turn and Bank Indicator
d. Clock
Stabilized)
4. Copilot's Instruments
a. Altimeter (Sensitive)
b. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
c. Attitude Indicator (ADI)
d. Airspeed Indicator
e. Directional Gyro (DG)
5. Radios
a. Communication Iladio
b. Navigation Radio (As Required)
6. Miscellaneous Indicator
a. Instrument Air Pressure Gage.
Original lssue
2-15
sEcroN
2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
FUEL LIMITATIONS (Refet to Figure 2'5)
Maneuvering Fuel:
fuel starvation, maximu4 side -slip duration
a.
- Due to possible
iime is one minute when the L or R XFER PUMP FAIL light
is illuminated. The airplane is considered in a side slip any
time the turn and banh'ball" is more than one-half ball out of
the center (coordinated flight) position. Unusable- fuel quantity
increases when more severe side slip is maintained'
FUEL TABLE
TOTAL FUEL CAPACITY
USASTT FUEL
(u.s. GALLONS)
(u.s. GALLOT{S)
481.5
475.0
Figure 2-6
Fuel Balance;
a. Maximurn fuel imbalance is 300 pounds.
Unusable Fuel:
a. Unusable fuel is 3.25 gallons per side.
MAXIMUM OPERATING ALTITUDE LIMIT
Maxirnum Operating Altitude is 30,000 Feet.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITS
Cold Day:
from Sea Level to
-54 degrees Celsius C65 degrees
a.
-lined Fahreaheit)
- 25,300"feet,
de4:ees
at
to 30,000-feet
then straight
--6-3Ceisius (-8i degrees Fairenheit) Refer to S,e-ction 5, ISA Conversion and Operating Temperatwe Limits Charts.
Hot Day:
u.
b.
c.
2-16
+Sa.O degtees Celsius (*12? degrees Fahrenheit) for ground
operations t0 5000 feet.
ISA +3?.0 degrees Celsius (i99 degreee Fahrenheit) for all
ground operations from 5000 feet to 14,000 feet.
is.q +gz.o degrees Celsius (*99 degreqs Fahrenheit) for all
flight operations from sea level to 30,000 feet.
Original lssue
MODEL 406
sEcTtoN
2
LIMITATIONS
MAXIMUM PASSENGER SEATING LIMITS
The two forward seats are pilot seats.
12 passenger seats may be installed aft of the pilot
to Section 6 for seat locations.
A maximum of
seats. Refer
Original lssue
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LTMITATIONS
PLACARDS
On Instrument Panel.
PARKING BRAKE
PULL TO SET
"l-\
--TOn Left Side Panel
PARI(ING BRAI(E
DEPRESS RUDDER PEDALS. UNLt)CK
T-HANOLE, PULL OUT AND RETOCK'
UNLOCK T.HANDLE. PUSH IN AND,.
RELTASE.
-_- -NELOCT.
Tt) APPIY.
T()
.-
OO N(]T OEPRESS RUI)OER PEDALS.
On Instrument Panel Near Landing Gear Selector Switches:
OPE R AND EXTD
SPEEO I8 t) KIAS
MAX
HORN
UP
GEAR
--JI
V
DISABLE
DN
G
EAR
On Landing Gear Indicator Lights:
00116001
2-18
Original lssue
sEcTtoN 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
On Emergency Gear Control Cover.
EMER GEAR
EXTEND
r
6tAi strtcr
?
3
GTAS SYS C/B
PLJII
T HAN!TT
Adjacent to Wing Flap Position Control.
FLAPS
200 (TS
200KTS
APPB L
18
O
KTS
LAND
r80
Airplanes -0001 thru -0010
On Environmental Control Panel.
o,li;.N
NF^,rf,
/'"\
t1
CABIN LIEAT
WAqVt
---lili;
q
,\l
,r/
coorrR
CABIN AIR
c0c(Ptr
PULL
+
PIJLL
r,,,r,
80lH
n'o *
|
oir
PUSH
-f
orr
L
RAM Ar8
+
CAB]N
KTS
Airplanes -0011 and On
/
I4ANUAL
Iorrhost
I
FF
tSH
AIN
PULL
00116001
1 June 1987
2-19
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
On Left and Right Emergency Exit Window Trim.
On Right Wall Forward of Emergency Exit and On Left Ernergency Exit
Window Trim.
AFT FACING SEAT BACK MUST 8E
ERECT FOR TAKEOFF
&
LANOING
On Emergency Exits.
Internal:
ll
atr\
OPTN
J/
ct-osE
EXIT
Left Exit
Right Exit
Near Cabin Door
Exterior:
CLOSE
t
I
I
I
I
OPEN
2-20
TO OPEN
DOOR
ROTATE HAN DI-E OOWN
DTPT()Y U PPIR OOOR
RO]A] E SIII- TEVER LJP
STANo Cl-tAR Ar'10 oEPLoY L0WER 000R
TO CLOSE
OOOR
sT0w i0wER 000R
R0TATE S -r r-tvtR 00wN T0 r0cK
STOW
UPP
ER
DOO R
ROTATE HANOI-T UP
STOW HANOI.E
TO
TOCK
00116001
Original lssue
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
Near Cabin Door.
Internal;
EXIT
^Mffi
Near Cargo Door.
Erterior:
Near Left and Right Emergency Exits.
Exterior:
OP€N
t
I
I
I
ctosE
Near Crew Door.
Erterior:
I
LOCK
I
I
OPTN/
I
00t 16001
Original lssue
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
Near Crew Door.
Internal:
-!\
r'lI
cl,osEo
Near Cargo Door.
Internal;
DO()R
()PERATION
T0
0PEN'
SLIDE BUTTON
FWo+&
}
'
TO CL(]SE'
ROTATE
HANDLE
fiRlilE
)
00116001
2-22
Original lssue
SECTION 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
On Horizontal Part of Lower Baggage Shelf.
On Horizontal Part of Upper Baggage Shelf.
-r
On Cover of Extemal Power Recentacle.
EXTERNAI POWER
28 VoLTS 0.C.
N0MTNAL
8()() AMP
STARTING CAPACITY MIN.
O() N()T EXCEEO IT(]O AMPS
(rc11600r
Original lssue
2-23
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
On Control Pedestal.
l0
oFF A
A
LlI.rf f-Lle
0PtN
+
r,?;"r / \ --"U3sl
riftir-l
li;i/i f---
l,0cx
FUtr c6ossttto
T! 0Pll{
+
t0cK
---J
-tOn Pilot's Sunvisor (Forward Side).
On Pilot's Sunvisor (Aft Side).
(]PERATI(]NAL LIMITS
TI']I {A8KII\IGS AI\ID PLACAROS INSTALLED IN THIS AIRPIAIIIE COiITAIN
opiiririre rruiilttotts wttcH MUST sE coMPtlto wllli '/Ytlt
ainpLltt ttt Tflt i/oRMAL cATtcoRY olhtq oftn rNG
obiirlititic
THIS
iirv:iiaTions vi{ici Musr Bt coMPtrto wtrt wxttl 0PtnATlN6
'ptror s
iiii-ribnl,t-rL crtlconv rru cottrt*tt0 tr
"
r,uluat
tLtcttt
rppnovto
fiiiniiiie i*liitsb'ox ar,to
iriis- inpiaii ri lprnovtD fon oay ilrcHr vfn coNolTlolls lT Is
npgnowo ron olr.ucur ttn c0it0ln0 s allo tllctlls lNT0 lclN8
hirir'orrrolrs it
rnoptn tourPMtttl rs tttsTAtlE0 ANo oPERATlot'lat
iili
ii#iniiiii
lnnmt
tu
-
ut
irt
NO ACBOEATIC MAITTUVERS, INCLUOING SPII'IS, APPROVEI]
..--'--- 30'000 FttT
' ....-.-.-....90 l(lAs
-.-.' r80
..-KlAs
iiiiiiiiriu einCoprmrm sptE0-,,,, --......'-'
" ]80 xlas
i,rliiMuu eiln urtmto srElo- --.-.-'
-...''200
KlAs
APPR
unxim'u iLlp urtmro spE$ r 0 &
..- - ' -- 180 KAs
ir,ialiir'iur,,t rinp ixrtmto sPttD LArto'
..--'
162 KIAS
ulltuvtntle srtto - "" .----'.-' -
Alrlruot counor Sptt0.,-,
MAXIMUM 0PtnAllN6
riCriiilrLiiuri,r
Near Propeller Synchrophaser Control'
PROP
SYNC/PHASE
/'*0"
l+l
\
P+', **{,
00116001
2-24
Original lssue
sEcroN
MODEL 406
2
LIMITATIONS
To Right of Pilot's Altimeter.
Near Propeller Control Levers.
I]O NOT
REVERSE WITH
PRO
PS
D() NOT ATTEMPT
REVERSE WITH
PRt)PTLLERS FEATHERED
FEATH EREt)
Airyrlanes -000t thru -0010
Aileron Trim Indicator.
L
II
Rudder
Airplanes -0011 and On
ROLL
R
I
Trim Indicator.
lllevator Trim Indicator.
I
0
[iH
r|r|
Inside Left, Nose Baggage Door on Hydraulic Reservoir.
-
MAX FULL
ADD00116001
'1
June
.1987
2-25
sEcroN
2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
On Inner Side of Oil Filler Door:
ENGINE OIL
CAPACITY
9.2 US
OUARTS
SEE PITOTS OPERATING HANOBOOK FOR
APPROVTO OItS. ENTER OIT BRAND ANO
TYPt lN ENGINE t0G
800K.
5eoorsr ?s
On Inside of Nacelle Baggage Door (Left and Right)
MAX
BAGGAGE
2O(] LBS
Near Main Tank Filler CaP.
6ue!
lEr:-a
t37.s
ol1
Us
us€Aatl
tHi,,'j'':t#ffi
On Executive Top and Writing Desk Top.
TABLE MUST BE STOWED DURING
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING
On Stowage Drawer
DURING TAKEOFF & LANDING
DRAWER MUST BE IN STOWED
POSITION
00116001
l-zo
Original lssue
sEcTtoN 2
MODEL 406
LIMITATIONS
Inside Nose Baggage Doors.
Inside l,eft Nose Baggage Door.
EXTERNAL HYD.
RESERVOIR FILL
MtL-H-5606
-
Inside Avionics BaY Door.
ilr-Axriluil BAGGAGII-,
250 LBS
trAx
cAPACITY
OPIIONAL
LESS
EQUIP,
mrr00oi
Original lssue
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
MODEL 406
On Left Side Tailcone Forward of Rudder Hinge Line.
UNTOCK
UNL()CI(
BEF()RE TAXI
&
\o
FLIGHT
to cx
On Instrument Panel Near Oxygen Control (If Installed).
USE BLUE
OXYGEN
CONNECTOR ()NLY
0
X
Y
G
P
U
L
I
E
N
00116001
2-28
Original lssue
MODEL
406
EMERGENcY
t*3"t8JLTtS
sEcfloN
3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION
AIRSPEEDS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS .
...
.t-o
3-5
.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ABBREVIATED CHECKLIST
Emergencies .....:.
.t-t)
FAILURE
Engine Failure
-ENGINE
Before V, (Speed Below 98 KIAS)
Engine Failure After Vr (Speed Above 98 KIAS) .
Decision to Abort Takeoff
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Below Vr,ace) . .
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Above Vr"rca) . .
Both Engines Fail in Flight
Engine Securing Procedure
AIRSTART
Starter Assist
No Starter Assist . .
SMOKE AND FIRE
Engine Fire During Ground Operations (Sufficient Runway
Remaining to Stop) . .
Cabin Fire During Ground Operations
Inflight Wing or Engine Fire . . .
Inflight Cabin Electrical Fire or Smoke
rt-O
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-10
3- 11
3-11
Smoke Removal
3-L2
EMERGENCY DESCENT
Preferred Procedure
In Turbulent Atmospheric Conditions
GLIDE
.J_O
3-12
.
LANDING EMERGENCIES
Precautionary or Forced Landing With Power Landing Without Power . .
Landing With Flat Main Gear Tire
Landing With Flat Nose Gear Tire
Landing With Defective Main Gear
Original lssue
-
1 July 1986
3-L2
.
3-r2
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-1
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
MODEL 406
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
.......3-15
Landing With Defective Nose Gear
...... 3-15
Landing With Power, Landing Gear Retracted
....'.3-15
Landing With Wing Flaps Retracted
.....3-16
Engine Inoperative Landing
Engine Inoperative Go-Around (Speed Above 101 KIAS) . . . . . 3-16
.....3-16
.......3-17
........ 3-17
......3-17
....... .. 3-18
....'.3-20
'..3-21
.......3-22
Oxygen System Failure..
. . .. 3-22
Ice Protection Systems Emergencies ....
.........3-23
Avionics Bus Failure .
.'..3-23
Exits
..
Emergency
.. 3-24
.
......
Procedures
Rescue
LocatorTransmitter
Emergency
(Warning
Flag
Showing)
Failure
Encoding Altimeter
'...... ' 3-24
.. 3-24
.....
Emergency
Situations
Procedures
For
Transponder
.....3-25
...
of
Communications
Total Loss
.''......3-25
Electric Elevator Trim Runaway
.......3-26
.
SPINS
Ditching
SYSTEM EMERGENCIES
Propeller Synchrophaser Failure .
Fuel System Emergency Procedures
Electrical System Emergency Procedures
Hydraulic Systems Emergencies ...
Environmental Systems Emergencies . .
AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
AIRSPEEDS FOREMERGENCY OPERATIONS .... .. . ., ., 3-27
3-27
Maneuvering Speed (Ve)
. ...3-27
Maximum Gliding Distance Speed ..
..'..3-28
Air Minimum Control Speed (Vvco) .
One Engine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed (Vysc) . . . . . 3-28
....' 3-28
Takeoff Decision Speed (Vr)
......3-28
Takeoff Safety Speed (Vr)
3-2
1 June 1987
MODEL 406
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
Emergencies
ENGINE FAILURE
3-29
3-29
3-29
Engine Failure Before V, (Speed Below 98 KIAS)
Engine Failure After V1 (Speed Above 98 KIAS) .
Decision to Abort Takeoff
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Below Vr,rce) . .
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Above V"co) . .
3-30
3-30
3-32
3-33
Both Engines Fail In Flight
3-34
Engine Securing Procedure
3-35
--\AIRSTART
Starter Assist (Preferred Procedure)
No Starter Assist . .
SMOKE AND FIRE
Engine Fire During Ground Operations (Sufficient Runway
Remaining To Stop)
Cabin Fire During Ground Operations
Inflight Wing or Engine Fire . . ,
Inflight Cabin Electrical Fire or Smoke
3-35
3-36
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-39
3-40
Smoke Removal
Supplementary Information Concerning Airplane Fires
EMERGENCY DESCENT
Preferred Procedure
In T\rrbulent Atmospheric Conditions
GLIDE
3-40
3-41
3-41
3-41
3-42
.
LANDING EMERGENCIES
Precautionary or Forced Landing With Power .
Landing Without Power . .
Landing With Flat Main Gear Tire
-\
Landing With Flat Nose Gear Tire
Landing With Defective Main Gear
Landing With Defective Nose Gear
Landing With Power, Landing Gear Retracted
Landing With Wing Flaps Retracted
Engine Inoperalive Landing
Engine Inoperative Go-Around (Speed Above 101 KIAS) . . . .
Ditchins
1 June 1987
3-43
3-43
3-43
.
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-46
siel
3-47
.
3-48
3-49
3-3
sEcTloN 3
MODEL 406
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
SYSTEM EMERGENCIES
Engine Emergency Procedures
Propeller Syrrchrophaser Failure . .
Fuel System EmergencY Procedures
Electrical System Emergency Procedures
Hydraulic SystemEmergencies ....
Environmental System Emergencres
Oxygen Systen Failure ....
lce Protection Emergencies . .' . . .
Avionics Bus Failure
Emergency Exits . .
Cabi;Do;r, Crew Door or Emergency Exit Not Secured Light
Illuminated (Door Not Locked) .
Nose Baggage Door OPen on Takeoff
Emergency Locator Transnitter Rescue Procedures
Encoding Altimeter Failure (Warning Flag Showing)
Transponder Procedures For Emergency Situations
Total Loss of Communications ......
Electric Elevator Trim RunawaY . .
SPINS
.
rMencnNcv INF0RMATI0N
3-4
'
"""'
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-52
3-54
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-61
3-61
.t-ol
3-62
3-62
3-62
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-64
3-65 (3-66 blank)
Original lssue - 1 JulY 1986
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
MODEL 406
INTRODUCTION
Section 3 describes the recommended procedures for emergency situations. The first part of this section provides emergency procedural
action required in an abbreviated checklist form. Amplification of the
abbreviated checklist is presented in the second part of this section.
I{OTE
Refer to Section 9 for amended operating limita-
tions, operating proced,ures, performance data
and. other necessary information
equipped with specific options.
^AIRSPEEDS
for
airpLanes
FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS
Conditions:
1. Takeoff Weight - 9360 Pounds.
2. Landing Weight - 9360 Pounds.
3. Standard Day, Sea Level.
4. Wing Flaps - T.O. Position Unless Otherwise Noted.
5- Landins Gesr - UP.
(1) Maneuvering Speed With Wing Flaps UP (VA) . . . . . . 162 KIAS
(2) Maxinum Gliding Distance Speed With Wing
Flaps Up
. . 125 KIAS
(3) Air Minimum Control Speed (Vr,nce) .
......90KIAS
(4) One Engine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed
With Wing Flaps UP (VysJ At
Sea
Level
108
KIAS
(5) One Engine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed
With Wing Flaps UP (VysE) At 15,000 Feet . . . . . . 104 KIAS
(6) Takeoff Decision Speed With Landing Gear Down (Vr) 98 KIAS
(7) Takeoff Safety Speed (VJ
102 KIAS
Original lssue
3-5
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PBOCEDURES
{ABBREVIATEDPBOCEDURES)
MODEL 406
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ABBREVIATED
CHECKLIST
I{OTE
This Abbreuiated Emergency Procedures Chec'
hlist ts included as a suppkment to the AmProcedures CheckList. The
Emerpencv
nlified
'Alibreuiated
-Emi
rgency Procedures Chechlist
should not be used until the flight crew has
become familiar with the airplane and systerns.
AII Amplified Emergency procedure item.s must
be accimitish.ed reg-ardlbsi of which ch.ecklist is
used.
Procedures in the Abbreviated Checklist portion of this section shown
in bold face type are inmediate-action items and should be comnitted
to memory.
EMERGENCIES
Engine Failure
ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE V1 (Speed Below 98 KIAS)
l
Power Levers - GROUND IDLE.
2. Brakes and Noe€wheel Steering - AS REQUIRED.
If
Airplane Cannot be Stopped in Remaining Runway:
3. Fuel Control Levers - CUTOFF,
4. Battery and Generators - OFF.
ENGINE FAILURE AFTER Vl (Speed Above 98 KIAS)
1. Aileron end Rudder - AS REQUIRED to rraintain straight
ahead flight (3 to 4 degrees bank
with l/2 ball slip into operative engine).
2. Power - MONITOR.
3. Landing Gear - UP when rate-of-climb is positive.
4. Propeller - VERIFY feathered'
5. Airspeed - MAINTAIN Vz to 4OO feet minimum, then increase to fO8 KIAS.
6. Wing Flaps - UP.
?. Trim Tabs - ADJUST.
J-O
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(neenevtnrEDpRocEDUREs) EMERGENcYt"o%t8JlT.3
After Reaching 1000 Feet Above Ground Level:
8. Inoperative Engine - SECURE.
DECISION TO ABORT TAKEOFF
1. Landing Gear - CIIDCK DOWN. Gear
3
2
WHEN EX
Ficure 3-2
EMERGANCY EXITS
Original lssue
3-65 (3-66 blank)
sEcIoN 4
\IORMAL PROCEDURES
MODEL 406
sEcTloN
4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
AIRSPEEDS FOR
NORMALOPERATIONS .....,..
Page
4-3
4.3
NORMAL PROCEDURES ABBREVIATED CHECKLIST
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
ENGINE STARTING (Battery Start)
ENGINE STARTING (With External Power)
BEFORE TAXIING
4-4
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10
.
TAXIING ..
BEFORE TAKEOFF
TAKEOFF
CLIMB .
...
4-10
CRUISE.....
DESCENT
BEFORE LANDING
BALKED LANDING
AFTER LANDING ...,.....
SHUTDOWN ...
POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMIT"TER
.
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
Oxygen System
Heaiing and Ventilating Systens '
CHECK
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-72
4-t2
...4-rz
...4.72
'.....'
4-12
. . . .4-13 (4-14 blank)
AMPLIFIED NORMAL PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
ENGINE STARTING (Battery Start)
ENGINE STARTING (With External Power)
ENGINE CLEARING PROCEDURES
ENGINE IGNITION PROCEDURES
BEFORE TAXIING
TAXIING
BEFORE TAKEOFF
original lssue -
l
July 1986
4-77
4-19
.
4-20
4-22
4-24
4-25
4-1
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
MODEL 406
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTTNUED)
Page
TAKEOFF
CLIMB
4-28
4-30
.
CRUISE
DESCENT
BEFORE LANDING
BALKED LANDING
4-31
AT"IERLANDING..,..
4-35
4-35
4-32
4-34
SHUTDOWN
POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
CHECK
4-36
4-36
4-36
.
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
Oxygen System
Heating and Ventilating Systems
4-37
4-37
4-37
4-37
.
OTHER NORMAL PROCEDURES .. . . . .
Fire Detection and Extinguishing System
Stall . . .
Maneuvering Flight . .
Night Flying
Cold Weather Operation
AVIONICS SYSTEMS NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOISE ABATEMENT ..
PROCEDURES FOR PRACTICE DEMONSTRATION OF
Practice Demonstration of Vysa
Simulated Engine Failure in Takeoff Configuration . .
FUEL CONSERVATION .
4-38
4-38
4-38
4-40
4-48
VMCA
4-49
4-45
4-50
4-50
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
MODEL 406
INTRODUCTION
Section 4 describes the recommended procedures for normal operations. fne first part of this section provides nornal procedural action
;;;i;"d il checkiist form. Amplification of the abbreviated checklist is
presented in the second part of this section.
I{OTE
Reler to Section 9 for amended operating Limitations, operqting procedures, performance .data
and olher necessary informatrcn lor alrplanes
equipped with sPecific oPtions.
^
AIRSPEEDS FoR NoRMAL oPERATIoNS
Conditions:
l. Takeoff Weight - 9360 Pounds
2. Landins Weisht - 9360 Pounds
3. Sea Leiel, Standard DaY
(1) Air Minimum Control Speed With Wing Flaps
.....'90KIAS
In T.O. Position (Vuce) .
(2) Rotation Speed With Wing Flaps In T.O' Position (VR) 98 KIAS
(3) AII Engines Best Angle-of-Climb With Wing Flaps
.'...102KIAS
In T.O. Position (Vx) ...
(4) All Engines Best Rate-of-Climb Speed
. ' 109 KIAS
With Wing Flaps In T.O. Position (Vv)
(5) All Engines Best Rate-of-Climb Speed
. . . 112 KIAS
With Wing Flaps In UP Position (Vv)
(6) Maximum Operating Speed (V"6/M"s ) . . 229 KIAS/0'52 Mach
162 KIAS
(?) Maneuvering Speed (Ve)
(8) All Engines Landing Approach Speed
. ' ' 101 KIAS
With Wing Flaps In LAND Position .
(9) Speed For Transition To Balked Landing Conditions 101 KIAS
(10) Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocif . '.... 20 KNOTS
(11) Takeoff Decision Speed With Landing Gear Down (Vr) 98 KIAS
'..102KIAS
itz) Takeoff Safety Speed (V,) ...
itei Intentional One Engine Inoperative Speed (VssB) . . ' ' 98 KIAS
Original lssue
4-3
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
MODEL 406
NOTE
OVisually check inspection pLates and generaL
oirDlonp condilion durine uolh aroL"nd inspiction. lf night t'light is planncd. chech op
erction ol oll liehts and mah" surp a flnsh-
light ia aoailabLe.
aE&sute oirpLone has been
seruiced uith the proper grade
dnd type of ftEL
ORefer to Sectinn 8 for quatu
tities, materinls and. specilha
tions of frequedtly used. sernice
items.
'I
a.
Pitot Tube Cover(s) - REMOVE.
b. Control l,ocks - REMOVE and stow
c.
Parkins Brake - SET.
d. AII Switches - OFF.
All Circuit Breakers - IN.
l. Spare Fuses - ENSURE availabilitv
rg, Oxygen - ON; Quantity, Masks and Hoses (blue conneclor)
e.
-
CHECK; Orygen - OFF.
h. Landine Gear Switch - DOWN.
i. Trim T;b Controls (3) - SET for takeofi
j. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
k. Flap Position kver and Indicator - CHECK in same position.
l. Battery S$'itch - ON.
m. Fuel Gages - CHECK quantity and opention.
Fuel Totalizer - SET.
o. Anti-Collision Lieht', - CHECK oDeration then OFF.
p.
LishG (3) - CHECK o-peration then OFF.
'q. Navigation
Landlng LigbG (2) - CHECK operation then OFF.
r. Taxi Light - CHECK operation then OFF.
* s. Suface Deice Lights (2) - CHECK operation then OFF.
* t. Wing Recognition Lights (2) - CHECK operation then OFF.
'r u. Oscillating Beacon Ground Recognition Lights (2) - CHECK operation
then OFF.
'r v. Electric Windshield - CHECK operation by observing discharge on
battery ammeter if inflight use is anticipated. Ensure system is turned
off after ooerational check.
w. Pitot, Stall and Vent Heat Switch(es) - ON 20 seconds then OFF.
x. Battery Switch - OFF.
v. Cabin Fire Extinzuisher - CHECK Becuritv and pressure.
z- Win&hields and Windows - CHECK for cracks and eeneral condrtion.
2a.
Wing Locker Baggage Door - SECURE and LOCKED.
b. Wing Flap - CHECK secwity and attachment.
c. Control Surface Lock - REMOVE, if installed.
d. Aileron and
position.
Tab - CHECK condition. fieedom of movement and tab
Denotes items to be checked
installed on your airplane.
if
the applicable optional equipment is
Figure 4-1 (Sheet f of 3)
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
4-4
Original lssue
SECTION 4
MODEL 406
e,
NORI/IAL PROCEOURES
Trailing Edge Static Dischalge Wicks - CHECK condition and attach-
menl,
t. Stall Warning Vane - CHECK freedom of movement and warm.
Fuel Tank Fuel Quantity - CHECK; Cap - SECURE.
h. Fuel Tank Vent and Overboard Drain Line - CLEAR.
i. Bottom Outboard Wine - CHECK for fuel leaks or stains.
Outboard Deice Boot - CHECK condition and securitv.
3a.
Wing Tie Down - REMOVE.
b. Fuel Tank Sumps (2) - DRAIN; CHECK for water and contsmination.
c. Engirie _Compartment General Condition - CHECK for fuel, oil, hydraulic fluid and exhaust leake or starns.
d. Exhaust Stubs - EXAMINE stubs and scuppers for cracks or missing
material.
e.
Oil Cooler Inlet - CLEAR.
Oil Lcvel - CHECK: Cap-Secure.
Propeller and Spinner -EXAMINE for nicks, security and oil leals.
h. Intake Air Openine - CLEAR.
J.
tnboard Deic-e Booi - CHECK condir,ion and securitv.
Main Gear, Strut, Door, Tire and Wheelwell - CHECK
Engine Fire Ertinguisher Bottle Pressure - CHECK
t€mperature/charge Dressure on sage.
l. Crossfeed Line and ifuel Filte! Driin - DRAINT CHECK for water and
contamination.
m. Hydraulic Fluid Relief Overboard Line - CLEAR.
n. Lower luselage, Nose and Cent€r Section - CHECK for fuel, oil and
hydraulic lea-ksor stains and antenna security.
o. Wing Leading Edge Vent Inlet and Outlet - CHECK clear of obstructrons.
4a.
Crew Door - UNLOCK door handle with kev.
b. Hydraulic Fluid Regervoir Level - CHECK.
c.
Emergency Landing Gear Blow Down Bottle Pressure - CHECK in
Lhe green arc. Check ihat red ring is not showing on the control rod. If
red ring is visible. refer to the Airplane Maintenance Manual before
flight.
- SECURE and LOCKED (with key).
Avionics Bay Door - SECURE and LOCKED (with kei).
Nose Gear, Strut, Stop Block. Door. Tire, Wheel Well - CHECK.
Tie Down - REMOVEPitot T\rbe - CLEAR and WARM.
Ram Air Inlet - CLEAR.
Pitot Tube - CTEAR and WARM.
Oxygen Overboard Discharge Indicator - CHECK ereen diec installed.
Alcohol Reservoir - CHECK for quantity, dipstickln and cap closed.
Battcry - CHECK.
Baggage Door - SECURE and LOCKED (with key).
d. Nose Baggage Door
e.
I.
i.
j.
*k.
*t.
m.
n.
5a.
Wing Leading Edge Vent Inlet and Outlet - CHECK clear of obstruc-
llons.
b. Overboard Drain Lines (2) - CLEAR.
Denotes iteds to be checked
installed on your airplane.
if
the applicable optional equipment is
Figure 4-l (Sheet 2 of 3)
PREFLIGIIT INSPECTION
Original lssue
4-5
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
MODEL 406
Fuselage, Nose and Center Section - CHECK for fuel oil' and
hvdraulic fluid leaks or stains and anmnna secunty ^-for water and
Fitt"" oi"in - DRAIN; CHEcK
contamination
qld-contamination'
i'u.iT""[ So-p (2) - DRAIN; CHECK fo: water
i\4"* G;;", Si*r, ooor, Tire and Wheel Welt ' CHECK'
c. Irwer
d.
".
i.
d';;6; ii;;;"d-ru'i
Bottle
;. 6;;i;;'h;;;-n-Jiieui"h".
pressure on gage.
h.
i.
-i.
, k.
t;.
;:
Preseure
-
CHECK
lemperature/charge
Oil Cooler Inlet - CLEAR.
Oil Level - CHECK; CaP'Secure.
Exhaust Stubs - EXAMINE stubs and scuppers tbr cracks or mrssrng
material.
i=Jiard Deice Boot - CHECK condition and security'
lntake Air OPenine' CLEAR.
leaks'
securitv
ijffi;ll;;;,;i5pi-n'n""-' ExetnltNe for nicks'
"and"oil
oil' hv'
tuel'
for
cHEcK
Ger'".u1--Co"dition
b;".i;;'b;;;;ir-ent
dra:ulic fluid and exhaust leaks
o. Wing Tie Down - REMOVE.
Deice Boot - CHECK condition and security-'
-,r a- Outboard
b. E;ft; dtb.ard Wing - CHECK for tuel leaks or stailrs'
Line --C-LEA8'
i. Fu"t 'fu"t Vent and O-verboard DrainCap
- SECURE
CHECK;
FueL
;. b;;i
i;"i
Quantitv
l. 'giiL.-il"iu*td wine"' CHECK for tuel leaks or gtains'
i. C"irii"l Surface Lock -- REMOVE' if installed'
e. Aileron ' CHECK condition and freedom of movemem'.
fi: t;;ti';; E;;;S;ii" ois"trarge Wiits - cHEcK condition and attachment.
ftup - CHECK securitv and attachment. ----i.
j. Wl"e
wiiiE h&"" S"sg"ge Door -- SECURE and LOCKED'
.
a. Static Ports - CLEAR. Do not blow into static ports'
6. luii"on" Drain Holes - CHECK clear of obstructions' and securitv'
- i. rli"*j"Lt Si"Uitiiei O"ice Boot - CHECK condition
i. to.iiot Surface t ock(s) - R"EMOVE' if- installed-'
;: il;iH; trd;;5tiii"'iii""t'-.rg"-wi"t" CHECK condition and attachment.
and Tab - CHECK condition, freedom of movement and tab
f. ii6;;""
Dosition.
s. hudder
f;. ffiffi
Custlock - RELEASED.
"c-Hetii
iii"ii-l
-
condition, freedom of movement and tab
{rlliT""J st"uili*. oeice Boot - CHECK condition and securitv'
j. Tie Down - REMOVE.
aecunty'
k. gieuato" und Tub - CHECK condition, freedom of movement
securitv'
and
condition
cHEcK
Boot
ljeice
r, l. il."i?ir,it"i'Suuitrzei
m. static Pods - CLEAR. Do not blow into static ports'
Cargo Door-and Hinges ' CHECK condition and secunry'
Uoder and fower Cargo Door Lakhes - ENGAGED'
p. ci6in iloo. - CHECK security and conditjon'
*
Denotes items to be checked
installed on your
- airplane.
if
the applicable optional equipment is
Fieuie 4-1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
4-6
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(reenevrerED
'RocEDURES)
*o*ro. r*otS3JLHS
NORMAL PROCEDURES
ABBREVIATED CHECKLIST
I{OTE
This Abbreuiated Normal Procedures Chechlist
includ.ed. as a supplement to the AmpLified.
Normal Proced.ures. Use of the Abbreuiated
NormaL Proced,ures Chechlist should not be used
until the flight creu has become familiar with
lhe airplane and. systems. ALI amptified normaL
procedire items rnust be accomplished regarrlless of uhich chechlist is used.
is
BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
1. Preflight - COMPLETE.
2. Crew Door - LATCHED and SECURE.
3. Cabin Door(s) - LATCHED and SECURE.
4. Baggage - SECURE.
5. Parking Brake - SET.
6. Control Locks - REMOVE.
7. Seat, Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - ADJUST and SECURE.
8. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
9. Cabin Heat Source Selector - OFF.
-
10. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.
11. All Switches and Circuit Breakers - OFF and Set.
12. Generator Switches - CHECK OFF.
13. Battery Switch - ON.
14. Interior and Exterior Lights - AS REQUIRED.
15. Passenger Advisory Lights - ON.
16. Landing Gear Switch - DOWN; Check Green Lights - ON.
17. Annunciaior Panel, Waming Lights
and Warnine Horns - PRES'S-T:O-TEST.
18. Firewall Shutoff Switches - CYCLE, lights check.
19. Fuel Quantity - CHECK.
20. Fuel Totalizer - SET (if installed).
21. Air Conditioner - OFF.
22. Powet Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
23. Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.
24. Fuel Control Levers - CUTOFF.
Original lssue
SECTION 4
NORMAL
PROCEDURES
(ABBREVIATED PROCEDURES)
MODEL 406
ENGINE STARTING (Battery Start)
1. Voltmeter - CHECK (24 volts minimum).
2. Propellers - CLEAR.
3. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - ON. Check Auxiliary boost pump annunciator light-ON, fuel pressure low
light-OFF.
START.
4. Start Switch
5. Ignition Lighi - CHECK ON.
6. Fuel Control Lever - RUN Above 12 percent N..
?. IT"T and Ng - MONITOR (1090 degrees Celsius Maximun).
8. Start Light - OFF Above 42 percent N, .
9. Start Switch - OFF (Ns 52 percent or Above).
10. Engine Instruments - CHECK,
11. Power Lever - INCREASE to 68 percent N, .
12, Generator Switch - ON.
13. After generator output decreases below 200 Anperes repeat steps
through 10, and 12 on opposite engine.
14. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
2
ENGINE STARTING (With Extemal Power)
1. Battery and Generator Switches - OFF.
2. External Power Unit - ENGAGE; then ON.
3. Propellers - CLEAR.
4. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - ON. Check AUX PUMP ON annunciator lieht on, FUEL PRESS LOW
annunciator light - OFF.
Switch
START.
5. Start
6. Ignition Light - CHECK ON.
?. Fuel Control Lever - RUN Above 12 percent Ng .
8. ITT and N8 - MONITOR (1090 degees Celsius Maximum).
9. Start Light - OFF Above 42 percent Nr.
10. Start Switrh - OFF (N.52 percent or Above).
11. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
12. Second Engine - START - Rcpeat steps 3 through 11.
13. Battery Switch - ON.
14. External Power Unit - DISENGAGE and REMOVE.
15. Generator Switches - ON.
4-8
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(eaenevrnrED
'RocEDURES)
*otto.
t*oTFJl,o#3
BEFORE TAX]ING
1. Passenger Briefing - COMPLETE.
2. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump
ffiX,"XP.YB}TARILY,
3. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump -
dfiflMAl-,
check an-
check annunciator lights
-
Instrument Air Pressure - CHECK.
Fuel Control Heaters - ON.
Avionics Bus Switches - ON.
Inverter Switch - ON.
Avionics - AS REQUIRED.
Cabin Temperature Controls - AS REQUIRED.
10. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
11. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD.
12. Brakes - RELEASE.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
TAXIING
1. Brakes - CHECK.
2. Flight Instruments - CHECK.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. Parking Brakes - SET.
2. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
3. Outside Air Temperature Gage - CHECK.
4. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK.
5. Fuel Crossfeed - CYCLE, then OFF.
6. Trim Tabs - SET.
?. Second Stall Warning - CHECK.
8. Wing Flaps - VERIFY T.O. Position.
9. Propeller Synchrophaser - OFF.
10. Autopilotfaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
11. Flight Controls - CHECK.
12. Avionics, Flight Instruments and Radar - CHECK and SET.
I
I
13. Overspeed Governors - CHECK.
14. Autofeather - CHECK.
15. Autofeather - ARM.
16. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
17. Annunciator Panel - CLEAR.
1 June | 987
4-9
SECTION 4
lrbnvAr
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
pnoceounes
(ABBREVTATED
eRocEDURES)
MODEL 406
Ice Protection - AS REQUIRED.
Anti-collision Lights - ON.
Recognition Lights - ON (if installed).
Pitot/Static Heat - ON.
Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.
Parking Brakes - RELEASE.
TAKEOFF
1. Power - SET FOR TAKEOFF.
2. Arnunciators - CHECK, autofeather lights illuminated.
3. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
4. Rotate - VR (98 KIAS).
5. Airspeed - 102 KIAS until obstacles are cleared.
6. Brakes - APPLY momentarily.
7. Landing Gear - RETRACT.
8. Airspeed - 112 KIAS.
9. Wing Flaps - UP.
CLIMB
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Power - SET (Observe ITT, torque and N" RPM limits).
Propellers - Synchronize manually.
Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired.
Airspeed - 140 KIAS (1i2 KIAS for maximum climb).
Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
CRUISE
1. Power - Set-Torque/RPM as desired (Observe ITT, torque and N,
RPM limits).
2. Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired.
3. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
4. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - AS REQUIRED.
5. Autofeather - OFF.
la ro
1 June 1987
MODEL
406
lnesnevterED
eRooEDURES) ,o*to,. ,*ot"t8Jl?.S
DESCENT
^.
1. Cabin Heat Source Selector
and Cabin Heat Controls - AS REQUIRED.
2. Defroster Knob - PULL.
3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
4. Autofeather - ARM.
5. Ice Protection - AS REQUIRED.
?. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED (Open if descending into warm air)'
8. Altimeter - SET.
9. Passenger Advisory Lights - AS REQUIRED.
10. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.
BEFORE LANDING
1. Wing Flaps - T.O. or APPR below 200 KIAS.
2. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK.
3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
4. Landing Gear ' DOWN below 180 KIAS.
5. Wing Flaps - LAND.
6. Landing and Taxi Lights - AS REQUIRED.
?. Propeller SynchroPhaser - OFF.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD
9. AutopilotAaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
10. Approach Speed - 101 KIAS.
11. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE at touchdown.
12. Power Levers - GROUND IDI,E after touchdown.
13. Brakes and Reverse - AS REQUIRED.
BALKED LANDING
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power Levers - ADVANCE for takeoff power.
Balked Landing Transition Speed - 101 KIAS.
Wing Flaps - T.O..
Landing Gear - RETRACT during lFR.g.q-around or simulated IFR
go-around after establishing a positive rateof-climb.
5. Trim airplane for climb.
6. Airspeed - ACCEI,ERATE to 112 KIAS (after clearing obstacles). I
?. Wine Flaps - UP as soon as all obstacles are cleared and a safe
altitude and airspeed are obtained.
1 June 1987
4-11
SECTION 4
NORI,IAL PROCEDURES (ABBREVIATED PROCEDUBES)
MODEL 406
AFTER LANDING
1. Ice Protection Equipment - OFF.
2. Pitot/Static Heat - OFF.
3. Transponder - SBY.
4. Radar - STBY (if installed).
5. Anti-collision Lights - OFF.
6. Recognition Lights - OFF (if installed).
7. Wing Flaps - T.O.
8. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
9. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.
SHUTDOWN
1. Parking Brake - SET if brakes are cool.
2. Postflight ELT Check - COMPLETE.
3. Avionics Master Switches - OFF.
4. Inverter Swiich - OFF.
5. Fuel Control Heater Switches - OFF.
6. Accessory Switches - OFF.
7. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.
9. ITT below 610 degrees Celsius for one minut€.
10. Fuel Control Levers - CUT OFF.
11. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pumps - OFF.
12. Generator Swirches - OFF.
13. Battery Switch - OFF.
POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
CHECK
1. VHF Communications Transceiver - ON and select 121.5 MHz'
2. Audio Control Panel - AS REQUIRED.
3. If Audible Tone Heard - Emergency Iocator transmitter switch OFF
then NORM.
4-12
Original lssue
MODEL
406
lreanevrnrED
pRocEDURES) ro^"o.
""3"t3J1H6
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
OXYGEN SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED)
If
oxygen use is desired, proceed as follows:
1. Oxygen Control Knob - PULL ON.
2. Mask - Connect and put mask on.
3. Oxygen Flow Indicator - CHECK flow (green indicates flow).
HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS
Heater Operation - Ground:
1. Starting Engine Procedures - COMPLETED.
2. Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.
3. Cabin Heat Auto Control - MANUAL.
4. Cabin Heat Manual Switch - AS DESIRED.
5. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
6. Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED.
Heater Operation - Flight:
1. Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.
2. Cabin Heat Auto Control - AS DESIRED.
3. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
Original lssue
4-13 (4-14 blank)
MODEL
406
1er'aer-rrreopRocEDURES)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
AMPLIFIED NORMAL PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
The Preflight Inspection, described in Figure 4-1, is recommended for
the first,flight of the day Inspec.tion procedures for subsequent flights
may
De aDDrevraf,eo
at tne pttot s drscretlon.
M)TE
If
a subsequent nreflipht insnection is oerformpd
ihnrtly afier shitd6w-n, be aware that eniine air
intake leading ed.ge g.s well a.s exho.ust outlets
may be uem hot.
A.
If the airplanc has been in extended storage, has had recent major
maintenance or has been operated from marginal airports, a more extensive ext€rior iaspection is recommended.
. After rrajor maintenance has been performed, a thorough preflight
inspection, accordance with Figure 4-1, should be completcd. Pay pirticular attention to the security of access panels and dobrs and fr6e and
correct movement of control surfaces. If the airplane hae been waxed or
polished, check the external static pressure aource holes for obstructions.
The fire extinguisher bottles, located in main wheel well, should
be
checked for the properly serviced indication. The indicated pressure will
change with change in ambient temperature.
If the airplane has been exposed to much ground handline, or has
been parked in a crowded hangar. it should be checked for dents and
scratches on wings, fuselage and tail surfaces, as well as damage to
navigation, anti-collision and landing lights, deice boots and avionics
antennas.
Outside storage may result
in water and obstructions in
airspeed
lines, condensation in fuel tanks, and dust and dirt in- the engine
,-,' "ystgT
arr lnlet and exhaust areas. If anv water is detected in the fuel svstem.
the fuel tank sump quick-drain valves, fuel crossfeed line quick-drain
va.lves and fuel lllter quick-drain valves should all be thoroughly drained
until there is no evidence of water or sediment contaminaiion-. Outside
storage in windy or gusty areas, or adjacent to taxiing airplanes, calls for
special attention to control surface stops, hinges and brackets to detect
presence of wind damage. The recommended use of the control locks will
remove this problem.
Prolonged storage of the airplane will result in a water buildup in the
fuel which "leaches out" the fuel additive. An indication of this is when
an excessive amount of water accumulates in the fuel tank sumps. Refer
to Section 8 for fuel additive servicins.
Original lssue
4-15
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
{AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
Exhaust stubs and the exhaust heated inlet scuppers inside each stub
should be inspected for overall condition prior to each flight. Missing. or
cracked scuppers may prevent the continuous inlet heat from operating
prope y.
If the airplane has been operated from muddy fr-e.lds- or in snow or
slush, check- the main gear and nose gear wheel yqlls f91 obstructions
and cleanliness. Operation from a gravel or cinder field will require extra
attention rc propdller tips and hoiizontal stabilizer leading edg-es where
abrasion can' be' encoun-tered. Propeller stone damage can seriously reduce the fatigue life of the blades'
Freouentlv check all components of the landing gear retracting mechanisms,'shocl struts, tires and brakes. This is esp€cially, important on
aimlanes oneratins from rouqh frelds and/or high altitudes. Improperly
ierviced shirck strits could ciuse excesgive landing and taxi loads on the
airplane structure. Landing gear shock struts should be checked before
nisltt to ensure they-aie not collapsed' This can readily be deter"^"il
nined b1 a visual inspection of the shoik strut lower piston assembly. If
surface of the lower piston assembly is not visible. the
ttr"
"ttpiint"a
sliock
itrut is collapsed and must be serviced before the airplane is
collapsed (zero ent€nsion) shock strut could cause
opet ted. A completeiy
-landing
gear retraction syst€m. Airplanes that are
a'malfunction i; the
6sfeciatly
at high i titudes, are subjected to
rough
fields,
froop"iut"O
abnormal landing gear abuse.
mahe sure the fuel tank filler caps are
To nrevent loss of fuel in flieht,
-venLs
on the lower surface of the tanks
sealed. The fuel tank
sliouli also be inspected for obstructions, ice or water, especially after
operation in cold, wet weather.
tisfitii
The interior inspection will vary according to, the plannq4 flight.and
the oDtional equipment installed. Prior to high-altitude flights. it (iIis
imporiant to ch-eci< the condition and quantity of oxygen face masks
i""'taUeal and hose assemblies. The oxygen supply system (if installed)
should bb functionally checked to ensur6 that it is in working order. The
o"vgutt p."".ut" sagd (if installed) should indicate 300 to 1850 pounds
pei "squate inch dEpinding upon the anticipated requirements.
Satisfactory operation of the fuel control heaters, pitot- tubes, static
sources and itall- warning transmitter heating elements is determined by
observins a discharge olithe ammeter when the fuel control, pitot/static
and stali vane switihes are turned ON' Actuating the pitot/static and
stall vane switches for 20 seconds, immediately prior to the exterior
elements sufficiently so they will feel
inspeclion. will warm the heating-inspection.
lf operation of the static
warm to ihe touch during the
source heaters is questionable, -run the back- of -a finger from the fuselage
skin across the stitic port and then onto the fuselage skin. If operation
is still ouestionable, the effectiveness of these heating elements can be
verified'by cautiously feeling the heat of these devices while the
Ditot/static heat switches are on.
4-16
Original lssue
MODEL
406
sEcloN
lnver-rrreo pRocEDUREs)
4
NORMAL PBOCEDURES
If the emergency landing gear extension T-handle was noticed to be
partly extended during, the cockpit preflight lnppection. the emergency
Jandrng gear exlension blow down valve assembly should be reset a1 th'e
blowdown bottle in the left nose compartment in accor&nce with the
airplane Maintenance Manual. If the rld band is visible, the blowdown
bottle must be serviced in accordance with the airplane Maintenance
Manual before flight. lf the red band is not showins, push the cable
towards the valve assembly, then check the bottle -pressure gage for
norm{u pressure.
Flights at night and in cold weather involve a careful check of other
specific areas which will be discussed later in this section.
BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
1.
Preflight - COMPLETE.
2. Crew Door - LATCHED and SECURE.
3. Cabin Door(s) - LATCHED and SECURE.
a
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
t2.
13.
14.
Baggage
- SECURE.
Parking Brale - SET.
Control Locks - REMOVE.
Seat, Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - ADJUST and SECURE.
Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFT.
Cabin Heat Source Selector - OFF.
Cowl Flaps - OPEN.
All Switches and Circuit Breakers - OFF and SET.
Generator Switches - CHECK OFF.
Battery Switrh - ON.
Interior and Erterior Lights - AS REQUIRED.
a. Master Lighting Swit{h , AS REQUIRED.
b. Panel Lights - AS REQUIRED.
c. External Lights - CHECK OFF.
I{OTE
Ground oper.ation of the high intensity anticollision tighls can be of.considerablc annoyance
Lo
Erouna personnet and other pllots.
15. Passenger Advisory Lights - ON.
16. Larding Gear Switch - DOWN; Check Green
Original lssue
Lights - ON.
4-17
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEOURES
1AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
1?. Annunciator Panel and Warning Lights - PRESS-TO-TEST.
a. Annunciator Panel Master
Warning Lights - PRESS to reset mast€r warning.
l{olE
The press-to-test function wiLI also test the
landi.ig gear warning horn, stall warning horn,
autopiloi mode repeater annunciators, aLL marh'
er bbacon tights, altitude alert annunciator and
the RN ani BC lights in the NAV 2 Indicator'
The gyro inuerter and auionics bus switches
nust 6e ON to check the light displays in the
autop ilo
t
mo
de selecto r.
18. Firewall Shutoff Switches - DEPRESS, Bleed Off or Optional Fire
Bottle Armed lights illuminated; DEPRESS again, lights go out.
ANY TIME THE WHITE FIRE EXTINGUISHER LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINA'|ED,
DEPRESS/NG THE BUTTON WILL FIRE
THE BOTTLE.
19. Fuel
Quantity - CHECK.
(if installed).
20. Fuel Totalizer - SET
21. Air Conditioner - OFF.
Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
THE PROPELLER NEVERSING LINKAGE
CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE POWER LEVERS ARE MOVED AFT OF THE FLIGHT
IDLE DETENT WHEN THE ENG/NES ARE
NO? Rt/NNING.
Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.
24. Fuel Control Levers - CUTOFF.
4-18
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(rurpurreo pRocEDUREs)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
ENGINE STARTING (Battery Stan)
Voltmeter - CHECK (24 volts minimum).
- CLEAR.
Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - ON. Check AUX PUMP ON annuncrator light ON, FUEL PRESS LOW
annunciator OFF.
Start Switch - START.
Ignition Light - CHECK ON.
Fuel Control Lever - RUN above 12 percent N" .
7. ITT and Ns - MONITOR (1090 degrees Celsius maximun).
1.
2. Propellers
IF NO ITT R/SE 13 OBSERVED WITHIN 10
SECONDS AFTER MOVING THE FUEL
CONTROL LEVDR TO RUN. OR ITT RAP-
IDLY APPROACHES
1O9O DEGREES CELSIUS. MOVE THE FUEL CONTROL LEVER
TO CUT-OFF AND PENFORM ENGINE
CLEARING PROCEDURE.
8. Stari Light - OFF above 42 percent Ns.
9. Start Switch - OFF (Ns 52 percent or Above).
10. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
11. Power Lever - Increase to 68 percent N. .
12. Generator Switch - ON.
13. After g€nerator output decreases below 200 amperes, repeat steps
through 10, and 12 on opposite engine.
2
M)TE
ODuring a cross start of either engine the ENG
START lieht for the lirst engine slarted. may
blink as the enEine being started nears the end
ol its start cyile. Norially the tight uill not
blink but if it does it is acceptable.
OIf eith.er ENG START light remains ON after
engine stqrt, the stdrt relay or cross start rel,ay
is clnsed. Perforrn SHUTDOWN.
14. Power Levert - FLIGHT IDLE.
Do not operate or, Il.irrror", d.uring
engine
starts,
Original lssue
4-19
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
{AMPLIFIEDPROCEDURES)
MODEL 406
ENGINE STARTING (With External Power)
1. Battery and Generator Switches - OFF.
SHOULD THE EXTERNAL POWER UNIT
DROP OFF LINE DURING START, A TOTAL
,LOSS O,F ELECTRICAL POWEN WILL RESULT WHICH COULD RESULT IN A HOT
START
(ITT WILL BE
INOPERATIVE).
SHOULD A IOSS OF ELECTNICAL POWER
OCCUR, IMMEDIATELY PLACE THE FUEL
CONTROL LEVER TO CUT OFF, TURN THE
BATTERY SWITCH ON, MONITOR ITT
AND ENSURE THE ENGINE IS SHUTTING
DOWN. PLACE THE STARTER SWITCH TO
THD MOTOR ONLY POSITION TO AID IN
REDUCING ITT IF NECESSARY.
M)TE
When an external power unit is used, ensure
the unit is negatioe[y ground.ed dnd regulated to
28 uolts DC with a capability of prouiding a
minimum ol 800 amperes during the starting
cycle. Exlernal power units with output exceeding 1700 amperes shall not be used.
Unit - ENGAGE; then ON.
- CLEAR.
Fuel Auxiliarv
ON. Check AUX PUMP ON annunciatnr light ON,
Boost Pump
- - FUEL
PRESS LOW annunciator light - OFF.
Start Switch - START.
Ignition Light - CHECK ON.
Fuel Control Lever - RUN above 12 percent N, . naximum).
2. External Power
3. Propellers
,1
o.
7.
IF NO ITT R/SE 15 OBSERVED WITHIN 10
SECON'S AFTER MOVING THE FUEL
CONTROL LEVER TO RUN, OR ITT RAPIDLY APPROACHES 1O9O DEGREES CEL.
SIUS, MOVE THE FUEL CONTROL LEVER
TO CUT OFF, START SWITCH OFF AND
PERFORM ENG/NE CLEARING PNOCEDURES.
4-20
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(ar',rpr-rrreo pRocEDUREs)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
8. ITT and N. - MONITOR (1090 degrees Celsius rnaximum).
9. Start Light - OFF above 42 percent N, .
10. Start Switch - OFF (Ns 52 percent or above).
I1. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
72. Second Engine
' START - Repeat steps 3 through
11.
I{OTE
ODuring a cross start of either engine the ENG
START light for the first engine started mat/
blink as the engine being started nears the end
ol its start cycle. NormalLy the Light wilL not
blink but if it d.oes it is acceptabLe.
OIf either ENG START light
remains ON
start relny or cross
start relay is closed.. Petorm SHUTDOWN.
stead.y after engine start, the
13. Battery Switch - ON.
14. External Power Unit - DISENGAGE and REMO\rE.
15. Generator Switches - ON.
Engine starts may be made with airplane battery power or with an
external power unit. However, it is recommended that an external power
unit be used when the ambient air temperature is less than 0 dLgrees
Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius). Refer to Cold Weather Operation ir
this section when ambient temperature is below 0 degrees Fahrenheit
(-18 degrees Celsius).
Before engine starting with the airplane batteries, check the voltmeter
for a minirnum of 24 volts. After startins the first encine, allow the
generator charge rate to decrease below 20d amperes before starting the
Secono englne.
With turbine engines, the operator must monitor ITT during each
engine start to guaid against a'"hot" start. The operator must be ready
to immediately stop the start if ITT exceeds 1090 degrees Celsius or is
raoidlv aonroachina this limit. Usuallv "hot" scarts are not a problem if
thi n6rm'al startin[ procedures are followed. A "hot" start is caused by
excessive fuel flow at normal revolutions per minutc or normal fuel flow
with insufficient revolutions per rrinute. The latter is usually the problern which is caused by attempting a start with low battery voltage. If a
cold encine does not o-,rite iate at"52 percent, it is acceptable to a-dvance
If the staitc accelerates the gas generator
rapidly above 20 percent, suspect gear train decouple. Do not continue
start. Rapid acceleration through 35 percent Ns suggests a start on the
secondary nozzles. Anticipate a hot start.
the poier lever slightly.
Original lssue
4-21
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
{AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
it is essential before the
drain off -unburnt fuel'
time
to
attempt to allow adequate
-from
could- lead to a hot
""ii'.t"ti
engine
fuel
the
residual
f'uit"." to drain'all
sGrt, a hor streah leading to hot section damage. -or. the. torching of
buming fuel from engine eihaust on the next successful igrition.
A.fter an aborted start for whatever reason,
A dry motoring, within start€r limitation after confirming- that all fuel
drainagt has stopled, will ensure that no fuel is trapped before the next
starl.
ENGINE CLEARING PROCEDURES
1. Fuel Control Lever - CUTOFF.
2. Fuel AuxiliarY Boost PumP - ON.
3. Start Switch - MOTOR.
DO NOT EXCEED THE S']:ARTING CYCLE
LIMITATIONS; REFER TO SECTION
2,
4. Start Switch - OFF
5. FueI AuxiliarY Boost PumP - OFF.
ENGINE IGNITION PROCEDURES
switch is left q -t-he NOR|'I nosiFor most operations,
-i*it"h the ignition
in thii position, ignition is oN onlv when the
tioir]'w-l*, it E
starter switch is in the START position.
However. the ienition swikh should be truned ON to provide continuous ignition undei the following conditions:
1. Emergency engine starts without starter assist.
2. Operation on wat€r or slush covered runways.
3. Flight in heavy PreciPitation'
ha"c been in
BYPASS for 5 minutes'
5. When near fuel exhaustion as indicated bv RESERVOIR FUEL
LOW annunciator ON.
4. During inadvert€nt icing encounters until the inertial
4-22
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(nr"rpr:rreo
pRocEDuRES) *o""or
r"ot"t8Jl*S
BEFORE TAXIING
1. Passenger Briefing - COMPLETE.
2. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - OFF momentarily, check AUX
PUMP ON and FUEL PRESS LOW
annunciators - OFF.
3. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pumps - NORMAL, check annunciator
lights - OFF.
Instrument Air Pressure - CHECK.
Fuel Control Heaters - ON.
Avionics Bus Switches - ON.
Inverter Switch - ON.
Avionics - SET.
9.. Cabin Temperature Controls - AS REQUIRED.
a. If heating/defrosting are desired:
(1) Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.
4.
5.
6.
?.
8.
TOTE
Manual Cabin Heat Control will oDen and clnse
the tentperdture control ualue lasier thnn Auto
Cabin Heat Control.
(2) Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED.
(3) Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
b. If ventilation is required:
(1) Cabin Heat Source Select - OFF.
(2) Fresh Air Fan Switch - LOW or HIGH.
(3) Ram Air Knob - PUSH.
(4) Defrost and Cabin/Cockpit Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
(5) Overhead Ventilation Blower Switch (If Instaled) - HIGH
or LOW.
10. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
11. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD.
M)TE
Do not use reuerse unless the propeller control
Leuers are in the full forward position.
12. Brakes - RELEASE.
Original lssue
4-23
SECTION 4
NORi,l!AL PROCEDURES
1AMPLIFIED
PBOCEDURES) MODEL 406
TAXIING
1. Brakes - CHECK.
2. Flight Instruments - CHECK.
A steerable nosewheel, interconnected with the rudder system, provides positive control up Lo 15 degrees left or right, and free -turning
from i5 desrees I"o 50 degrees for tharp turns during taxiing. Norma-l
steerins mai be aided thro-ugh use of difierential braling and differential
power 6tr tlie main wheels. These aids are listed in the preferred order of
irse. Do not use excessive brake on the inboard side to effect a tuming
radius as decreased tire life will result.
l{otE
If the airnlane is parhed uith the nosewheel
iastered. in eithei direction, initial taxiing
shoul.d. be done uith caution. To strdighten the
nosewhnel use full opposite rudder and d.ifferential power instead of differential brahing.
After a few feet of foruard. trauel, th.e nosewheel
wiLI steer normalLy.
When taxiilg near buildings or other stationary objects, observe the
minimum tumiirg distance limits; refer to Section 7. No ab,normal precautions are required when taxiing in conditions of high winds.
At some tine early in the taxi run, the brakes should be checked for
anv unusual reaction, such ari uneven bra-king. The horizontal situation
indicator should be checked for normal slaving and cross-checked with
the standbv mametic compass. Normal slavinE is indicated by oscillations of th6 gyro slaving indicator about the null point {45 degrees fixed
reference line on the HSI).
Taxi speed can be reduced by using normal bra-kir:g or by retarding
the oowei levers toward reverse aB des-ired' Minimize the use of reverse
thruit on unprepared surfaces. Placing one propeller into feather can aid
in reducing taxiing speed.
4-24
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(nrr,lpr-rrreopRocEDURES)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. Parking Brakes - SET.
2. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
3. Outside Air Temperature Gage - CHECK.
4. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK. 200 pounds per side minimum. Do not exceed 300 pounds
asymmetric fuel loading.
5. Fuel Crossfeed - CYCLE, then OFF.
6. Trim Tabs - SET elevator, aileron and rudder tabs in
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
,h"l
TAKEOFF range.
Second Stall Warning - CHECK.
a. Elevator - FULL Nose up.
b. Wing Flaps - EXTEND to LAND position.
c. Stall Warning Horn - VERIFY operation.
d. Wing Flaps - RETRACT to T.O. position.
e. Stall Warning Horn - VERIFY Horn silences.
Wing Flaps - VERIFY T.O. position.
Propeller Synchrophaser - OFF.
Autopilot/Yaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
Flight Controls - CHECK.
Avionics, Flight Instruments and Radar - CHECK and SETOverspeed Governors - CHECK (first flight of the day and after
maintenance).
a. Propeller Control Lever - FORWARD.
b. Governor Switch - TEST.
c. Power Levers - INCREASE RPM. Propeller should stabilize at
1725 + 50 RPM.
Power Levers - DECREASE RPM.
e. Governor Switch - RELEASE (switch is springJoaded to NOR-
d.
MAL).
14. Autofeather - CHECK (every flight).
a. Autofeather Switch - TEST.
b. Power Levers - INCREASE until torques are 400 foot-pounds.
Assure that both AUTO FIHER ARM annunciator lights are illuminated. Slowly retard the
LH power lever to FLIGHT IDLE noting_that
in sequence: The R AUTO FTHER ARM annunciator extinguishes, the L AUTO FTHER
ARM annunciator extinzuishes
below 225 footpounds torque and the -LH propeller begins to
feather. Increase the Ieft torque to 400 footpounds. Repeat procedure for right engine.
1 June 1987
4-25
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
(AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
NOTE
OTurbine inertia during leather may driue
toroue rasL the switch set point and cquse thc
AUTO' FTHER ARM anninciator to cvcLe off
and on.
aProper system operation i's cont'irmed once the
oroniller bepins to feather' ll is not necssary to
'susiain
thelest conditions until the propeLler is
fully feathered.
oCold. engine oil may cause slow propel,l,er
Assure that the propeLler
feathering
'beeins td response
leaiher within 4 seconds after the
second. annunciator extinguishes.
c. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
15. Autofeather - ARM.
16. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
1?. Annunciator Panel - CLEAR.
18'IceProtectionEquipmentgtfttos"*"tt.f,*tt""*i"$Yrt"T?ttlf
outside air temperature below 4 degrees
Celsius (40 degrees Fahrenheit).
a. Heated Windshield - CHECKED.
b. Stall Vane Heat - AS REQUIRED
c. Propeller Deice - AS REQUIRED.
d. Engine Inertial Separator Switches - AS REQUIRED'
19. Anti-collision Lights - ON
20. Recognition Lights - ON (if installed).
21. Pitot/Static Heat - ON.
22. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.
23. Parking Brakes - RELEASE.
Ensure the Before Takeoff Checklist is followed to pr€vent nissing an
important item.
The flieht and engine instruments should be checked -for normal
be set and
i"ai""ti"ti-*ittt "o *ii"i"g flags visible' All avionics should
altimeters
io. correct freque"ncieJ or operational modes' The with
each
press
crosschecked
re,
then
"hecGa
field
i"po.t6a
;i;;IJ b;-;"i;
other and against field elevation.
4-26
1 June 1987
MODEL
406
(nvprrrreo
PRocEDURES)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A mental review of all engine inoperative speeds, procedures and field
length requirements should be made before takeoff. Also, review the
normal speeds and power limits (torque, ITT and fuel flow).
NOTE
Ensure ueight d.oes not exceed 9360 pound.s before takeoff.
TAKEOFF
1. Power - SET FOR TAKEOFF (1382 foot-pountls torque maximum).
2. Annunciators - CHECK Autofeather Armed Lishts - Illuminated.
.DO
NOT TAKE OFF WITH AUTO-
FEATHER INOPERATIVE.
.AUTOFNATHER ARM ANNUNCIATON
LIGHTS SHOULD ILLUMINATE BETWEEN 80 AND 86% N. AND REMAIN
ILLUMINATED AT HIGHER N" SETT.
INGS.
Engine Instruments - CHECK.
Rotate - VR (98 KIAS).
Airspeed - 102 KIAS until obstacles are cleared.
Brakes - APPLY momentarily.
Landing Gear - RETRACT. Check GEAR UNLOCKED and HYD
PRESS ON lights off.
8. Speed at 50 feet - 102 KIAS.
9. Best Rate-of-Climb Speed - 112 KIAS.
10. Wing Flaps - UP.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Before initiating the taleoff roll, a go, no-go decision should have
been made in the event an engine failure should occur. Review the
anticipated performance presented in Section 5 and assure that the
operating weight limits of Section 2 are r'ot exceeded. In addition, review
the applicable procedures and speeds associated with one-engine operation so that the transition (in the event of an engine failure) will be
smooth, positive and safe. If the anticipated performance exceeds the
runway length available or obstacle clearance requirements cannot be
achieved, it is recomqrended to take off on a more favorable runway,
off-load the airplane until the anticipated performance is consistent with
existing conditions or delay the takeoff until more favorable atmospheric
conditions exist.
'I June 1987
4-27
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
(AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
Full oower operation is recommended on takeoff since it is important
that V,'is obtained as rapidly as possible. Accelerate the airplane Lo V'
before iotaiion for addit ional safety in case of an engine failure.
Takeoff roll is most smooihly initiated by gradually advancing the
power levers until the propeller revolutions per - minute.- nears 1900.
il{esitate slightly to alloiv ihe engine to appioach stabilization. then
smoothlv re'ieas! the brakes and iontinue advancing power levers to
fotq.r"" until the takeoff limi.t (1382 foot-pounds) is reached'
-"t"h
(tJnless rea'djusted. torque will increase approximate$ 50 foot-pounds as
Ievers are advanced too far
ioeed builds'up during'takeoff roll.) If power
'
a surge as.the prope-ller
expect
iriitial
application.
during
iapidly
6o
.
-beein
demanding greater blade angle. For maximum perfornovernb.s
hance takeolf power should be set before brake release. On runways
where propeller'damage from foreign objects is likely, allowing speed lo
t"iia bifoie applying iull power miy be- beneficial. Allowing the propeli"." ti-" to sirooi ui befoie applying takeoff torque during a touch and
go landing will minimize any asymmetric thrust.
For irosswind takeoffs the airplane is accelerated to a slightly higher
than normal rotation speed, and then is pulled off abruptly.to preir'ent
posslbi; settling back tb the runway while drifting. When -clear of the
|ound. a coord'inaled turn is made jnto the wind to correct for &ift.
After rotation at 98 KIAS, allow the airspeed to increase to Vr.
Maintain 102 KIAS until the obstacles have be cleared.
On lons runwavs, the landing gear should be retracted at the point
over the irnway where a wheels-down forced landing on that runway
would become impractical. However, on shoft runways, it mqy be preferable to retract th6 landing gear after the airplane is safely airborne.
Before retracting the landing gear, apply the b-rales momentarily -to
ston the rotation 6f the main-wheels. Centrrugal force caused by the
rao'idlv rotatins wheels expands the diameter of the tires, and if ice or
ti* accud, .t"d in the wheel wells, the rotatirg wheels may rub as
-ia
they enter.
To establish climb configuration, retract the landing g-ear, allow airto increase to 112 KIAS, retract the wing flaps and then increase
airspeed to 140 KIAS. Maintain taleoff power.
soeed
CLIMB
1. Power - SET - Torque/RPM as desired (Observe ITT, Torque and
N. RPM limits).
2. Propellers - SYNCHRONIZE manually'
3. Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired.
l+-za
1 June 1987
MODEL
4.
406
sEcTloN 4
lnuerrrreo
Recommended Climb Sr:eed
-
CLIMB SPEED
PRESSURE
KIAS
ALTITUDE " FEET
5L
rO TZ,UUU
125
12,000 to 20,000
0
20.000 to 30.000
1't
5. Speed for Maximum Climb - 112 KIAS (if
6. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
^
NORMAL PROCEDURES
PRocEDURES)
required).
Normally, maximum climb power is maintained during the climb to
cruise altitude. Adjust the power levers as required to prevent exceeding
1382 foot-pounds torque or a nominal climb ITT of 680 degrees Celsius,
whichever'occurs first.
NOTE
To prolong engine Life, d.o not exceed, 680
grees Celsius
ITT
d.e-
d.uring cLimb.
This power setting provides the best performance and range. At Iower
altitudes and outside air temperatures (below approximately 15,000 feet),
the engines will reach the torque limit before reaching the ITT or N"
limit. As the climb progresses, the ITT and N, will increase until ar
altitude is reached where the ITT or N, will dicta:te power lever positioning. When operating near the ITT limit, advance pirwer levers ilowly to
allow current ITT to be indicated. The rate of power (and temperature)
increase of the engine is greater than the response rate of the ITT
therefore, a rapid power lever advance could allow an overtemperature
condition to exist momentarily in the engine before the overtemperature
would be indicated.
Prior to engaging the synchrophaser system, the propellers revolutions
per minute must be closely synchronized manually (confrrm with a check
of the propeller tachometers) due to the limited capture range feature of
the system.
After light illumination, confirm the propeller revolutions per minute
has not exceeded 1900 revolutions per ninute. The propeller revolutions
per minute can be adjusted by symmetrically moving the propeller controls as required. The PHASE knob may then be rotated as required to
achieve the desired noise characteristics.
If a major propeller revolutions per minute change is made with the
synchrophaser system ON and the propeller controls are not moved
symmetrically, the sSmchrophaser rnay break lock resulting in propeller
speed oscillation. The system should be turned OFF, the propeller revolutions per minute reset manually and the synchrophaser turned back on.
For most normal flight operations, the cowl flaps may be allowed to
trail. In very hot arnbient conditions, it may be necessary to Iock the
cowl flaps fully open during climb.
1 June 1987
4-2sl
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
(AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES} MODEL 406
CRUISE
1' Power-
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set
torque/RPM-*if
i*1rlylru"tiIl;Tl"1f .s"1 T;
Maximum Cruise Powbr Chart in Section 5.
Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired'
Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
Fuel Crossfeed Selector - AS R.EQUIRED.
Autofeather - OFF,
Do not exceed the maximum cruise torque shown in Section 5.
Normally, new engines should exhibit an ITT slightly below 695 degrees
Celsius when set to maximum cruise torque.
Before visible moisture is encount€red with outside air t€mperature
between -30 degrees Celsius (-22 degrees Fahrenheit) and 4 degrees
Celsius (40 desrees Fahrenheit), ensure the anti-icing systems
(windshield, pitoi/static, stall vane, propeller heat and -inertial separaiors) are ON and operating. These systems are desigr:ed to prevent ice
iormation, rather th'an removing it afur it has formed. Accumulation cf
somJ aitfiame ice is unavoidabl-e; this will increase airplane weight and
drae and decrease airspeed and general airplane performance. lt is always
wise to avoid icing conditions, if practical.
.IF THE ENGINE INERTIAL SEPARATOR
1S NO? POSITIONED TO BYPASS, MOISTURE MAY COLLECT UNDER THE ENGINE INLET SCREEN AND FREEZE. SUBSESUEN'TLY, THIS ICE MAY SEPARATE
AFfER ENCOIJN?ERING HIGHER OU'TSIDE TEMPENATURES WHICH COULD RE'
SULT IN ENGINE DAMAGE.
.SURFACE DEICE BOOT ACTUATION BELOW -40 DEGREES CELSIUS CAN RESULT
IN PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE DEICE
BOOTS, AC'IUATE ONLY AS NECESSAR Y
TO REMOVE ICE BELOW .40 DEGREES
CELSIUS.
.PROLONGED ZERO OR NEGATIVE "G"
MANEUVERS WILL STARVE THE ENGINE
OIL PUMP AND RESULT IN ENGINE DAM'
AGE.
4-30
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(nrurpr-rrteopRocEDUREs)
sEcTloN 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
.WHEN FLYING IN ROUGH AIR, THE
PUU, 'qUXTUERY BOOST PUMPS WILL
ACTIVATE AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE
HOPPER FUEL FLOAT SWI'|CHES SENSE
A FUEL LEVEL BELOW APPROXIMATELY
230 POUNDS PEN TANK, IF'TRANSFER
FAIL" ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
GO OFF, POSITION THE FUEL AUXILIARY
BOOST,SWITCH ITO "ON". POSITION THE
IGNITOR SWITCH TO "ON" IN ROUGH AIR
AT FUEL QUANTITIES BELOW 50 POUNDS
PER TANK.
aIGNITION SHOULD BE TURNET) ON
WNTN PTYTNC
IN
HEAVY PRECIPITA-
TION.
DESCENT
1. Cabin Heat Source Selector
and Cabin Heat Controls - AS DESIRED.
2. Defrost€r Knob - PULL'
a. If heating/defrosting are desired:
(1) Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.
(2) Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED'
(3) Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED'
I{OTE
Manunl Cabin Heat ControL uill open and clnse
the ternperdture control ualoe faster than Auto
Cabin Eeat Control.
- OFF.
ARM.
Autofeather
Ice Protection - AS REQUIRED.
Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED (Open if descending into warm air)'
Altimeter - SET.
Passenger Advisory Lights - AS REQUIRED
Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.
3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector
tl
6.
7.
8.
9.
Original lssue
4-31
sEcTtoN 4
NOBMAL PROCEDUBES
(AMPLTF|ED
PRocEouREs) MODEL 406
During descents wilh progressive power reductions. the synchrophaser
may remaln engaged. Belbre large propeller revolutions Der minute
changes, .the .synchrophaser _should 6e positioned to OFF. Manually
synchronize the propellers, then select the ON position of the synchropn:$er.
- To _prevent confusion in int€rpreting which 10,000-foot segment of
altitude. is being displayed on the altimeter, a striped
-at warning seigment is
exposed on the face of the copilot's altimeter
all altiiudei below
10,000 feet.
If
fuel has been consumed at uneven rates between the two tanks
of prolonged one engine inoperative flieht, it is desirable to
balance the fuel load by operating both ensines -from the fi.rllest tank.
Fuel balancing will occur fairly rapidlv when irossfeedile as both encines
will receive fuel from the fullest tank plus fuel will be t-ransferred t6 the
lightesi tank at 500 to 800 pounds pei hour. If there is sufficient fuel in
both tanks, even.though
have unequa.l quantities, it is impor-the-y Bay
tant to position the crossfeed
selector to OFF for the landins.
because
BEFORE LANDING
1. Wing Flaps - T.O. or APPR below 200 KIAS.
2. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK. Maintain lateral balance
within 300 pounds differential.
3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
4. Landing Gear - Dovn below 180 KIAS. Check down lights - ON;
unlocked light - OFF.
5. Wing Flaps - LAND.
6. Landing and Taxi Lights - AS REQUIRED.
7. Propeller Synchrophaser - OFF.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD.
9. Autopilot/Yaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
10. Wing Flaps - LAND below 180 KIAS
11. Approach Speed - 101 KIAS.
DO NOT NAISE REVERSE TRIGGERS
IN FLIGHT.
12. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE at touchdown.
13. Power Levers - GROUND IDLE after touchdown.
14. Brakes and Reverse - AS REQUIRED.
4-32
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(rr',rpurreoPRoCEDURES)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Landing gear extension before landing is easily detected by a slight
in airplane trim and a slight "bump" as the gear locks down.
Illumination of the gear-down indicator lights (green) is further proof
that the gear is down and locked. The gear unlocked indicator light (red)
will illuiinate when the gear uploc[s are released and wilf remain
illuminated while the sear is in transit. The unlocked lieht will extinguish when the gear hai locked down. If it is reasonably cErtain that the
sear is down and one of the eear-down indicator lishts is still not
illuminated, the malfunction coul-d be caused by a burneid out light bulb.
This can be checked by pushing the annunciator panel press-to-test
button. If the bulb is burned out, it can be replaced with the bulb from a
post light. If the gear warning horn sounds at FLIGHT IDLE, the gear
may not be locked down.
change
A simple last-minute recheck on frnal approach should confirm that
all applicable switches are on, the gear-down indicator lights (green) are
illuminated and the gear unlocked indicator light (red) is extinguished.
Landings are conventional in every respect. A power approach is used
down to 50 feet above ground level using power as required to stabilize
the approach speed and attitude with wing flaps fully extended, landing
g"ar iitended ind airspeed of 101 KIAS.-A decision must be made aI
the 50-foot point to completc the landing or initiate a balked landing
climb using the appropriate procedure. The landing is completed by
retarding the power levers and intiating a flare into the landing attitude.
The airplane should touch down main wheels frnt slightly above stall
speed. The nose is then gently lowered to the runway, power levers are
positioned to GND IDLE and brakes applied as required. Al abrupt
power reduction could result in a hard landing. Landings on rough or
soft runways are done in a similar manner except that the nosewheel is
lowered to the runway at a lower speed to prevent excesgive nose gear
loads.
For minimum distance landings, a power reduction is initiated on
FLIGHT IDLE during
the laiding flare. The airplane should touchdown, main wheels fird
with minimum flare. The nose is then gently lowered to the runway,
power levers are positioned to GRND IDLE and brakes applied as
passing 50 feet. The power levers are retarded to
^
requrreo.
Maxirnum braking effectiveness is obtained by applying full even
to the toe brakes without locking the wheels and applying full
back nressure to the control column. Tliis procedure is reidnirnended
only for emergency stops aB excessive brake pid and tire wear will occur.
Maximum brake wear occurs at high speed.
pressure
Original lssue
+-o,,
sEcTloN 4
(AMPLIFTED
NORMAL PROCEDURES
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
When a short ground run is the major consideration, retard the power
to reverse as required. Do not exceed the maximum revene power
limits shown in Section 2. Maximum effective braking is initiated immediatelv while continuing to hold the control wheel full aft. If assymetric
reverie is experienced move po*", levers toward ground idle.
levers
NOTE
The airplane is conlrollable with proper pilol
Lechniqie, with only one engine/propeller lully
reuersid. and Lhe other ?ngine at ftiehl idle. The
power leuers should not ie rapidly reLqrded beiou ground idte until symmelrtc response is
uerifted.
II
For crosswind approaches, either the wingJow, crab or combination
method may be used. After touchdown lower the nosewheel and maintain
control. A itraight course is maintained with the steerable nosewheel,
and occasional b"raking if necessary. Excessive reversing on dirty runways
will accelerate propeller erosion.
BALKED LANDING
1. Power Levers - ADVANCE to takeoff power.
2. Balked Landing Transition Speed - 101 KIAS.
3. Wing Flaps - T.O..
NOIE
OExperience indicutes that retro'cting the landing gear during an operational .VFR go ground;
uhpn on tmmPdlatc Isndtng ts
contemploted'
has been cond.uciue to gear up landings.
aAluays t'olLow the Bet'ore Landing Chechlist.
4. Landing
Gear - RETRACT during IFR.g.q-around or simulated IFR
qo-around aftei establishing
a positive
rate-
of-climb
5. Trim airplane for climb.
I
II
6. Airspeed - ACCELERATE to 112 KIAS (after clearing obstacles).
as soon as all obstacles are cleared and a safe
z. Wine" Flaos
- - UP
allilude and airspeed are obtained.
4-34
'| June 1987
MODEL
406
sEcTroN
lnrurer-rrreopRocEDURES)
4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
AFTER LANDING
1. Ice Protection Equipment - OFF.
2. Pitot/Static Heat - OFF.
3. Transponder - SBY.
4. Radar - STBY (if installed).
5. Anti-Collision Lights - OFF.
6. Recognition Lights - OFF (if installed).
7. Wing Flaps - T.O.
8. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
9. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.
the active runway, the wing flaps should be retracted. Be
After leavins-flaps
switch is ide;tified beiore letracting the wing flaps.
sure the wing
The wing flips aie positioned to T.O. before the engines are shut down
to allow-a thorough preflight inspection of the flaps system before the
next flight.
SHUTDOWN
1.
Parking Brake - SET
if
brakes are cool.
2. Postflight ELT Check - COMPLETE.
3. Avionics Master Switches - OFF.
4. Inverter Switch - OFF.
Fuel Control Heater Switches - OFF.
6. Accessory Switches - OFF.
1. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.
9.
^
ITT
below 610 degrees Celsius for one ninute.
10. Fuel Control Levers - CUT OFF.
11. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pumps - OFF.
12. Generator Switches - OFF.
13. Battery Switch - OFF.
If
dustv conditions exist or
if
the last flight of the day has
been
completed, install engine inlet and exhaust covers to protect the engines
from debris. The covers may be installed after the engines have cooled
down (ITT indicators showing "off scale" temperatures)' Secure propellers to prevent windmilling with no oil pressure.
Original lssue
4-35
sEcTroN 4
NORMAL
PROCEDURES
{AMPLIFIED
PROCEOURES)
MODEL 406
POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
CHECK
1. VHF Communications Transceiver - ON and select
2. Audio Control Panel - AS REQUIRED.
121.5 MHz.
NOTE
Do not trqnsml.t on 121.5 MHz unless there
qn etlergency.
is
3. If Audible Tone Heard - Emergency Locator Transmitter Switches
OFF than NORM.
As long as the function selector switch on emergency locator transmit-
ter remains in the AUTO position, the
emerg€ncy locator transmitter
automatically actuates following an impact of 5 g's or more over a short
period of time.
If the ernergency locator transmitter can be heard transmitting, place
the function selector switch in the OFF position and the tone should
cease. Immediately place the function selector switch in the AUTO
position to reset the emergency locator transmitter for normal operation.
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
OXYGEN SYSTEM
If
(lf Installed)
oxygen use is desired proceed as follows:
1. Oxygen Control Knob - PULL ON.
PERMIT NO SMOKING WHEN USING
OXYGEN. OIL, GREASE, SOAP, LIPSTICK, LIP BALM AND OTHER FAMY
MATERIALS CONSTITUTE A SERIOUS
FIRE HAZARD WHEN IN CONTACT
WITH OXYGEN. BE SURE HANDS AND
CLOTHING ARE OIL-FREE BEFORE
HANDLING OXYGEN EQUIPMENT.
2. Mask - CONNECT and put on mask.
3. Oxygen Flow Indicator - CHECK Flow (green indicates flow).
4. Disconnect hose coupling and push control knob in when not in
use.
4-36
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(nvpurreo
eRocEDURES) *o"ro. r"ot"tFJL?.3
HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS
Heater Operation - Ground:
1. Starting Engine Procedures - COMPLETED.
2. Cabin Heat Source Selector - BOTH.
3. Cabin Heat Auto Control - MANUAL.
M)?E
Manual Cabin Heat Control will open snd close
the tempera.ture control ualue fasier than Auto
Cabin Heat ControL.
4. Cabin Heat Manual Switch - AS DESIR.ED.
5. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
6. Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED.
Heater Operation - Flight;
1. Cabin Heat Source Selector - BOTH.
2. Cabin Heat Auto Control - AS DESIRED.
3. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
OTHER NORMAL PROCEDURES
FIRE DETECTION AND EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM (IF
INSTALLED)
Fire extinguisher bottle pressures will vary considerablv with ambient
Lemperature. The lire exti::guisher bot-lle gages. are calibrated to indicate
p_roper charge based on -temperature. Gage readings must be at or above
the pressure. corr€sponding to the ambient temperaturc to indicate a
propeny sen.lceo Dotue,
STALL
The stall characteristics of the aimlane are conventional. Aural warning is provided by the gtall warning horn between 5 and 10 KIAS above
the stall in all configurations. The wing flaps UP stall is also preceded
by a moderate aerodynamic buffet whi;h iircreases in intensiW
-byas the
s[a-ll is approached. 'The wing flaps LAND stall is preceded
light
buff-et just priqr to the- stall. The power-on stall occuis at a ver.i steep
pitch angle with or without flaps. Ii is difficult to inadverbently
sial th;
-range
airplane -during normal maneuvering. Due to the large speed
be-the
[ween wing flaps UP and wing flapi LAND stall spe;ds,
immidiate
relraction of wing flaps from LAND to UP should be avoided at slow
speeds. Follow all recommended procedures for wing flap retraction.
Original lssue
SECTION 4
NOBMAL PROCEDURES
(AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
MANEUVERING FLIGHT
No aerobatic maneuvers, inctuding spins, are approved in this airpU"J; [6*"".., the airplane is convinti6nal in all respects through the
^maneuvering range encountered in normal flight.
NIGHT FLYING
Before starting the engines for
a night flight' position the master
rheostats to provide
t" T.liGHr uttd idiutt ihe
"'ilj'jiirtiiii"iiitin
illumination to check all swikhes, controls, etc'
'enoueh
Navigation lights. ajq then checked by observing. reflec.t'ions from the
lights should be
oavement or qround. t ne operation
-i"fl;tion"of tle anti-collisionA-fter
starting th9
the
on
if,"iilii'^6i'.,"u'.-e*i;e-tit"
Eound
cnecKeo
rray
be
lights
eneines. the retractable landing
-switches
-ext€nded -and
to oFF turns the
1t.,"-l"iaitie light
lights off, birt leaves them extended.
;lil;ilif.
'R":il;ft
Before taxi, the int€rior lighting intensity is normally de.creased to the
?l^*ttl"ti uti itt" Zontr-ols and s-witches are visible' The taxi
-i"iiiti.tit
iigil l[*n b€ turned on prior to taxiing at night.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
Use of an APU is recommended when ambient temperatures are below
0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius)'
THE WrNGS AND TArL SU&!-AC-ES
ntusr nn CLEAR OF ICE' SNOry AN.2
PRroR To rAKEoFg 4s
iiosr CHARACTERISTICS
-TiIENi
CAN BE
ADVERSELY AFFEuIED.
Durins operation in cold wet weather, the possibility-of brake freezing
special pieca"tions should b-e taken' When spyere ic;nq
weather conditions - -exist' parked
""#til'iii"iJt".",
;;' ;'.;;;i;;-ilisi"ie uilttt freezing
;oif""ondition"
(not set)' If .ice is found
;irnG;illi;tfi-fi; tt"l". i"inspeclio", heat the
brakes with a ground
"t#ir"ail
d;-tltg
il
it"ni+t
-irt"
"u"a
are removed' If a
moisture
of
uii
tta"""
l"u'ti"it.
tt".i". J"i
alcohol
pour
isopropvl
.p.uv
i;
;;;-;;ii"bi;,'
Ii8fia"r'titlii the brakes to remove the tce.
.o'
iMIL-F-5566) on
4-38
Original lssue
MODEL
406
rer.,rpr-rrreopRocEDuBES)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
IF BRAKES ARE DEICED USING ALCOHOL,
ENSURE ALCOHOL HAS EVAPORATED
FROM THE RAMP PRIOR TO STARTING
ENGIN'S AS A FIRE COULD RESULT.
If neither heat or alcohol is available, frozen brakes can sometimes be
freed by actuating the brakes several times using maximum brake pressule.
^
When airplane is,stopnqd on the _taxiway or runway and brale fteezeup occurs, actuate the brake several times using maximum pressure. To
raduce possibility of brake freeze-up during taxi operations in severe
weathei conditions, two taxi slowdowns (from 35 to 15 MPH) using firm
brake pressure may be made permitting brakes to reach a warm condition ivaporating iny moistur6 build utwithin the brake.
After take off from slush-covered runways or taxiways, leave landing
a short period, allowing wheels to spin' This will allow
ientrifueal force to throw off any accumulated slush which should preclude fr6zen brakes on landirg. Ensure wheels are stnpped before retracting the landing gear to prevent buildup of ice or slush in the wheel
qear down for
wells.
During cruise, electrical equipment shouid be managed- to assure adequate ge"nerator charging throughout the flight, since cold weather adversely affects batt€ry capacity.
Prior to landing, and with gear down, maximum brake pressure should
be applied several-times to alleviate any brake freeze-up caused by icing
in tlie brake assembly during flying conditions.
Original lssue
4-39
sEcroN
4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
(AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
AVIONICS SYSTEMS NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
When operating airplanes equipped with optional ARC 1000 series auionics, refer to Section 9
for the appropriate auionics operational proced.ures and. Limitatinns.
1OOO
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
1. VOL HDST/SPKR
Control - Initial setting of both controls at 2 o'clock position. The
VOL HDST outer concentric knob sets the master volurre level for the headsets. The VOL SPKR inner concentric knob sets the master volume level of the speaker.
ltotE
Set the indiuidunl uolume controls of each receiuer onLy after setting the master uolume leuel
controls on the aud.io control Danel.
2. INTERCOM ON/OFF
Selector Switch - AS REQUIRED. When the switch is set to the
ON position
it
provides communication between
pilot and copilot without having to actuate any
microphone button. In dual installations, setting
either of the INTERCOM selector switches to
ON provides intercommunication- During transpilot or copilot wheel microphone buttons are pressed, the interphone function is muted
mrssrons where the
iIOTE
OThe interphone leueL is ad.justable only
throu4h the master HDST or SPKR controls
and shouLd be ad.justed from the initial 2 o'clock
setting to the d.esired. leuel before the indiuidual
receiuer controls are set to their final d.esired
leuel.
)The
speaker interphone function shnul.d onLy
be used. with oxygen mask microphones because
the normal lip rnicrophones will cause a feedback squeal in the cockpit.
Olntercornmunication between piht and copilat
should not be attempted using the hand-h.eld
microphone, since keying the microphone uill
hey the transmitter for whateuer Com the function selector suitch is set.
4-40
Original lssue
MODEL
406
(rurplrrreo
pBocEDURES)
SPKR/OFF/HDST Receiver
Selector Switches - SELECT any
dividrrally or
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDLIRES
of the receiver audio signals incombination for simultaneous
in
monltrol1ng.
I{OTE
Set the ind,iuiduaL receiuer uolume controls at
th,eir final d,esired leueL onLy after establishing
the interphnne Leuel uith the nTdster controls. In
the euent that interphone is not being utilized,
set the indiuidunl receiuer uolume control's with
the mqster controls at the 2 o'clnck position.
4. Function Selector
Switch - AS REQUIRED. Select COM 1, 2, 3 or CABIN. The
transmitter sidetone audio will be heard in the headset or
sneaker for the appropriatelv selected transmitter. In dual
iirstallations, the sideione will only be heard bv pilot and
copilot when both audio control panels are set to the s€me
transmitter selection.
5. AUTO SPKR/HDST
Selector Switch - AS REQUIRED' Selects the appropriate receiver
audio or'transmitter sidetone for reception on the
headset or speaker' On dual installations, the pilot's control banel activates only the pilot's headset or speaker and the copi.lot's control panel
activat€s only the copilot's headset or speaker.
6. Marker Beacon
HTGHA'WMUTE switch
f:".*it,",t*"?;
i"#
l3.r'*l"i:
MUTE position is momentary and
mutes the marker beacon audio for
approximately 30 seconds.
otE
oThe marker beacon and' DME au.dio leuel is
ad.iustabl.e onLv Lhrouph the naster uolume controls, therefori, it is finportant to heep the mas'
ter controls within Lheir normaL operating range
of approrimately 2 o'cloch. * any indiuiduaL
c'ornfdrt adiustment to tahe care of ambient
uoice Leuel or uariations in headset tlpes (muff,
single receiuer, etc.)
aDo not operate the master uolume controls at
an extrernbly lou setting while turning up the
indiuidunl receiuer uoLume conlrols to an extremelv hieh selttne. This could result in distortion o7 NAV. CoNi and ADF audio as well as
low leuek of MKR and DME aud'io.
Original lssue
4-41
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
{AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
?. Cabin Communication - Cockpit communication with the cabin is
accomplished bv setting the function selec-
tor switch to CABIN position and actuat-
ing the hand-held microphone or boom or
oxyeen mask micronhone. When the cabin
wrifies to communicatc with the cockpit,
actuation of the cabin-mounted microphone key lights the CABIN CALL inilicator on thdaudio control panel to signal
the cockpit. When the function selector
switch is-set to CABIN, communication is
established between the cockpit and cabin.
4OO
AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER
1. OFF/VOL Control - ON; ADJUST to desired listcning level.
2. PRI Frequency Selectorc - SELECT desired operating frequency.
3. SEC Frequency Selectors - SELECT desired operating frequency.
4. 1-2 Selector Switch - 1 position.
l.olE
The 1-2 selector switch can be plnced tn th'e "2"
position for operatinn on secondary freErcncy.
The resel.ect larnp will fLash only when freqrrcnqt
sebctian is outside of operating range of the
receLDer.
5. ADF SPEAKER/PHONE Switch - SELECT speaker or phone po6. ADF Pushbutton - PUSH
IN
sition as desired.
and note rclative bearing on ADF
Indicator.
7.
IN and hold until indicator pointer
off indicated bearins at least 10 to 20
TEST Pushbutton - PUSH
slews
degrees.
that pointer returm to the same relative bearing as in step 1.
9. HDG Control - SET goniometer-indicator dial so that index indicates magnetic or true heading of airplane. Pointer indicates bearine to station.
8. Indicator Pointer - Observe
4-42
Original lssue
MODEL
406
1er*er-rrreo eRocEDURES)
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
When switching stations, plaNe function pushbutton in the REC positian. Then, after statinn
has been selected, place lunction pushbutton in
the ADF Dosition to resume autornntic direction
find.er operation. This practice preuents the
bearing indicator from swinging bach and. forth
as freEnncy dial is rotated..
10. BFO Pushbutton - PUSH IN as required.
r|orE
A
1000-Hz tone is heard in the audio output
whcn CW signal (Morse Code) is tuned. in pioperry.
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR TRIM DISENGAGE CHECK
1. Operatc the electric trim switch in one direction and observe motion of the manual pitch trim wheel in the proper direction. While
perforrning the above test, nomentarily depress APIRIM DISC
switch and release. Observe that manual pitch trim wheel motion is
arrested and remains stopped when the disconnect switah is released and electric trim swilctr is actuat€d.
2. Repeat Step f. in the opposite direction.
3. Elevator Trim - SET for takeoff.
Original lssue
4-43
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4OO
1AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
MARKER BEACON
1. LOIHI MKR Swit'ch - SELECT HI position for airwav flving or
LO Position for ILS aPProaches'
2. SPKR/OFF/HDST MKR Switch - SEIECT speaker or headset
auoro.
3. VOL (HDST OR SPKR) CONTROL - ADJUST volume level'
4. Marker Beacon rest switch - lcruA.rP
ftotE
"?""igffi""1}1i"#i};:
oThe marker beacon and, DME audin leuel is
adjustable only through the nrdster oolume contr6ls, thereforL, lt is irnportant to heep -the rnos'
ter control.s within thcir nnrmaL operat.tnS. rdweol approximately 2 o'cloch ! dny LndtDl-dual
c'omi6rt adiustment to tohe care of ambient
uoicb leuel or uoriations
singLe receiuer, etc.)
in headset types (muff,
ODo not operate the master uolume controk at
lou setttng while tur.ning up the
ii
"rtr"^bLy
uoLume controla to an exreceiuer
indiuidual
tremelv hish settine This could result in distor'
tion o7 NAV, COIrt and ADF sudio os uell as
Lou leuels of MKR and DME audio.
4OO
NAVIGATION/COMMUNICATIONS
Pretuning Active Nav/Com Frequencies:
1. COM OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON; adjust to desired audio level'
2.
^siil,elC-fons - FREQUENCY
MANUALLY ROTATE corresponding NAV or
COM frequencv selectors (press 25/50 pushbutton
as reouired to- select the desired third fractional
COM'digi$ until the desired freqlency. is shown in
the freqiency readout window' The display bli*s
ioi approxlmatety 8 sec-onds. indicating that the
selected frequency is ready tor storage ln memory'
1,2,3
3.
-' MEMORY
frequencv memory button as inifihdfu; I pnnss the active
ai""t"a Uv the illumiruited iiremory. bar'.The .displav
immediatily stops blinking. indicating that the new
ii"q""""v is stored in th6 active memory arrd displays thi new active frequency' The original active
frequencY is lost.
4-44
Original lssue
MODEL
406
lnverrrreo
PRocEDURES)
sEcTroN 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
In Memory.
1. COM OFF/VOL CONTROL - TURN ON; adjust to desired audio
Preselecting and Storing Nav/Com Frequencies
level.
2. FREQUENCY SELECTORS - MANUALLY ROTATE corresponding NAV or Com frequency
selectors (press 25/50 pushbutton as
required to select the desired third
fraitional COM digit) until the desired frequency is shown in the fiequency readout window. The display blinks for approxirrately 8 seconds, indicating that the selected
frequency is ready for storage in
3. MEMORY
4.
1. 2.
memorv'
3
Pushbuttons - PRESS the memory pushbutton of one of the NAV
or COM memories not in use. The display immediately stops blinking, and displays th-e irew frequency for 1 second to indicate that it is now stored
in the selected memory. The display then reverts to
indicating the active frequency.
Merrory 1, 2, 3 Pushbuttons - REPEAT STEPS 2 and 3 r,o smre
another frequency in the second
NAV or COM memory not in use.
IOTE
This presetting sequence for memory 2 or 3 does
not effect comrnunication and/or nauigation operation on the originaL actiue frequency.
Recalling a Stored Frequency:
1. MEMORY 1,2,3 Pushbuttons - SELECT ard PRESS the desired
NAV or COM memory button,
and observe the following:
a. Frequency in selected memory becomes the active frequency.
b. Frequency readout window indicates new active frequenoy.
c. Corresponding memory bar indicates selected memory.
Communication- Receiv-er-Tranimitter Operation
1. COM OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON.
2. XMTR SEL Switch (on audio control panel) - SET
to
rtesired 400
NAv/COM.
3. SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Switches
(on audio control panel) - SET to desired mode.
Original lssue
4-45
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
(AMPLIFIED
4. coM Frequency serection
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
f,,t:tnf;l Sffl:i* T"ddift-^i.d'ff6tri
1. 2 or 3 pushbuiton to recall a preset
fiequency,- or by manually select'ing the
desired operating frequency using t}le
COM frequency selectors and
25/50
pushbutton.
M)TE
If
duat VHF cornrnunications systems are initatLed, improued cornmunication with the airplane on fhe ground may be obtained b-y usiryg
-the
VHF COM 2 which is connected to the
uertical fin antenna. Airframe masking of the
RF sisnals lrom the Inwer ft'tselage antenna ossociatid wtih the VHF COM 1 sometimes imp air s
ground
co
mmunication.
5. Vol control - Adjust to desired audio level'
6. SQ' Control - ROTATE counterclockwige
to
decrease background
noise as required.
?. Microphone Button:
a. To Transmit - PRESS;
speak into microphone'
RELEASE.
b. To Receive
OPeration:
Navigation
"COfr,f
OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON; adjust to desired audio level'
r.
Selectnr Switches
2.
-- SPEAKER/PHONE
(-on audio cbntrol panel) - Set to dested mode'
3.NAVFrequencyserectionirt:,?nllrl;:Jf
t""ftI"+tilf Eff8H"f ?
2'or 3 nushbutton to recall a preset
frequenci, or by using NAV frequency
selecf,or.
4. NAV VOL Control - ADJUST to desired audio level'
5. ID-VOX-T Switch:
a. To Identify Station - SET to ID to hear navigation station
identifier signal.
b. To Filter Out Station - SET to VOX to include frlter in audio
circuit.
4-46
Original lssue
MODEL
406
SECTION 4
NORIJAL PROCEOURES
(avpr-rrreo PRocEDURES)
6. ARC PUSH-TO/PULL-FROM Knob (if applicable);
a. To Use As Conventional OBS - PLACE in -center detent
and
select desired course.
Obtain Bearing TO VOR
b.
"' To
sLti"" - puSH ("1'nC/puSg-rO) krob to inner (Momentary
On) position.
olE
ARC larnp wilt iltuminate amber qhile the O4S
cira is m'ouing to center thc course- de-
"iirti
iTiion
potnter. Afler alignment has
been
achieoed'to reflect bearing TO VQR' -automdtlc
ra.dial cenlering uilL sutomattcally sryul
do.w:LA
causing the ARC lamp to 8o -out and the AftL,
hnob lo return to the center detent posrtton anq
function os a normal OBS
Obtain Continuous
c.
" To
B;"'tiliiRbM-Vbn St"tio" - PULL (ARC/PULL-FR) knob
to outer det€nt.
t{olE
ARC lamp witl illuminate amber: OBS, course
card, will turn to center the course deDlatlon
bearing
ioiiter uith a FROM flag to indicate
'from
VOR station. This $/stem .urtl co.ntrnuduy
'driDe to present the VOR radiaL the airplane ts
on untU'manually returned to the center detent
W the Pilot.
ti.iif,,"1tT;
?. AP/CPLD Annunciator Lisht -clIECK
,o) Jl'6ll
1000A IFCS is engaged), amber
light illuminated'
VOR Self-Test Operation:
1. COM OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON'
2. NAV Frequency Selector Switches - S.ELECT usable VOR station
slgnar'
0'
course-at course- index;,course deviation
pointer centers or deflects l9{9r-9gh!' $epending on
bearitts of signal; NAVAO-FROM indicator shows
TO or FROM.
3. OBS KNOB - SET for
Original lssue
4-47
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
(AMPLIFIED
PROCEDURES) MODEL 406
4. IDIVOX/T Switch - PRESS to T and HOLD at T; course deviation pointer centers, NAV/TO-FROM indicator shows FROM. AP/CPLD and XMIT
annunciators are illuminated and the COM
and NAV displavs show 188.88 with all mem-
ory bars illuminated.
displace course approximately 10o to either
side of 0" lwhile holding' iD/VOX/f). Course deviation pointer deflects full scale in direction corresponding to course displacement.
5. OBS Knob - TURN to
NOISE ABATEMENT
Increased emphasis
on improving the quality of our
environment
requires renewed effort on the part of all pilots to rninimize the effect of
airplane noise on the public.
We, as pilots, can demonstrate our concern for environmental improvement by application of the following suggested procedures, and
thereby tend to build public support for aviation:
1. Pilots operating airplanes under VFR over outdoor assemblies of
persons. recreational and park areas, and other noise-sensitive areas
should make every effort to fly not less than 2000 feet above the
surface, weather permitting, even though flight at a lower level may
be consistent with the provisions of government regulations.
2. During departure from or approach to an airport, climb after
takeofl anil descent for landine should be madi: so as to avoid
prolonged flight at low altitudi near noise-sensitive areas. Avoidance of noise-sensitive areas, if practical, is preferable to overflight
at relatively low altitudes.
NOTE
The preceding recommend,ed proced,ures do not
apply whe.re they uould conflic.t with Air.Traffic
Control cleqrances or instructions, or where, in
the pilot's jud.gment, an altitu.d.e of less than
2000 feet is necessary to ad,equately exercise his
duty to see and sooid. other airpl.anes.
The flyover noise level, established in compliance
maximum continuous power is 72.0 dB(A).
with FAR 36 at
No determination has been made bv the Federal Aviation Administration that the noise level of this airplane is, or should be, acceptable or
unacceptable for operation at, into, or out of any airport.
4-48
Original lssue
MODEL
406
SECTION 4
(rr',rpltrteoPRocEDUREs)
NORMAL PROCEDURES
PROCEDURES FOR PRACTICE DEMONSTRATION
oF
^^
vMcA
Enrine inoperative procedures should be practiced in anticipation of
This practice should be conducted at a safe altitude and
recovery
""-"ni.ig"".y'.
tt sr]arted at a safe speed of at least 115 KIAS-'beAs
.no"ia
lowered in
speed mav
;i;ilii; il eained wiLh practice, the starting ir:
conditions is
.*uii i""t"'.""t. until the feel of the airplane emergency
directional
is
reduced,
speed
ihe
as
il'"1liii"-*i. ii "itould be noted that
b""o-". more diffrcult. Emphasis should be placed on Stopping
"o"t-i
yaw angles bv Ihe'IMMEDIATE app-lication of rudder
ih;-iliiiJ ttc"
-tv"nankin"g
sliglitly away from the yaw. Practice should be
a
"ript"i"-*ti
(ti
coirective reaction is deveJoped and
instinctive
a"
i"-"ii"iila ""tiji
procedure is automatic and, (2) airspeed, altitude, -and
ittJ'"iit*ti"" 'maintained
easily while the airplane is being.pre.pared for
n"lai"i, i"ii be
expect
.
a climb. tf a failed engine's propeller is allowed to w-rndnr['
significantly
to
be
coordination
for
requir6d
deflection
;ia; f"; and
greater.
Practice Demonstlation ol
vMcA
1. Wing FlaPs - T.O.
2. Landing Gear - UP.
3. Power Levers - SET takeoff power'
4. Airspeed - VssE (98 KIAS) minimum'
5. Trim - SET for takeoff'
6. Instmctor Pilot:
a. Power Lever of Simulated Failed Engine - IDLE'
b. ProPeller Control Lever of
Sirnulated Failed Engine - FEATHER'
7. Airspeed - DECREASE at approximately 1 Knot per second until
reaching V""^ (rdd radial) oi stall warning, whichever
occurs first.
8. Heading - MAINTAIN .with rudder and 5 degrees bank towards
operatrve engue.
V."o is used in training and is not a limitation'
br*;i""r,i;;;;;pi-r*
ii.i"ing,
It
is^ recommended'
demonstrations, takeoffs and landings'
this aimlane should not be flown at a speed slower than
v ssE-
Under no circumstances should should Juce - demonstration be atti;;i;t;;;i1ha" ihe red radial 6ii'the airspeed indicator'
t"-iiii'"i'i
Original lssue
4-49
sEcTtoN 4
r.ronMAr
pnoceouaes
(AMpLTFTED
pRocEDURES) MODEL 406
Simulated Engine Failure in Takeoff Configuration
Wing Flaps - T.O.
Landing Gear - DOWN.
Power Levers - SET takeoff power.
Airspeed - 98 KIAS ininimum.
Trim - SET for takeoff.
Instructor Pilot:
a. Power Lever of simulated failed engine - 150 foot-pounds.
7. Aileron and Rudder - AS REQUIRED to maintain straight ahead
flight (3 to 4 degrees bank with 1/2 ball slip
into operative engine).
8. Power Levers - TAKEOFF POWER, (failed engine, simulated
takeoff power) .
9. Landing Gear - UP when rate-of-climb is positive.
10. Autofeather - MONITOR for proper actuation (simulated).
11. Climb to Clear Obstacles - 102 KIAS.
12. Refer to ENGINE FAILURE AFTER ROTATION checklist.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Simulated engine failure taleoff and landing practice is most safely
done with both propellers set at 1900 revolutions per minute and the
simulated failed engine set at 150 foot-pounds.
FUEL CONSERVATION
Operational maintenance and record-keeping techniques, taken togethir, can minimize wasted fuel, extend the use-ful range'of any airplane
and result in a significant reduction in general operating costs.
On preflight inspection, entrance doors, baggage doors, emergency
exits, cowl flaps and wing flaps should be checked for alignment. Any
one of these items not precisely aligned will create additional drag.
Good nechanical condition of the airplane and engines is very impor-
tant for efficient operation and therefoie, the best [se of fuel.-A ciean
exterior, especially on the wing leading edges, results in better fuel
economy.
Time spent on the ground in careful flight planning will avoid need-
less delays on the ground, unnecessary fuel stops and other conditions
that can be wasteful of time arrd fuel. Plan flight in a straight line
whenever possible and after takeoff, turn on course as soon as practical.
Take advantage of altitudes ard favorable winds, but balance the
ground speed benefits of high altitudes and winds asainst the extra time
consumed in climbing to reach best altitude, refer to Section 5, for Fuel
and Time Required Chart.
4-50
Original lssue
MODEL
406
SECTION 4
(er'aplrrteopRocEDuRES)
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Plan flishts with maximum occupancy; a little effort in coordinating
and schedrlling can provide many miles of travel with no additional use
of fuel by filling empty seats.
Plan arrival and departure times to avoid peak hours of operation at
airport. Substantial fuel can be saved by reducing the -time that the
airilane is operated on the ground. A call to the tower before slarting
i"du',t"a power and i short run-up before takeoff will all result
""fi""r,
in fuel savings.
In flight, use proper climb and trim techniques. r-aise the landing- gear
and wing -flaps as soon as,sat'ely practrcal and reter to becf,ron o' ror
rntoflnatron.
cruise Dertbrmance
When descending, stay high and avoid a far out descent' Descend at
uour
sesme;t indica6d speed with power reductions as appro-
Tit; ."a-.o" fot keeping th'e speed down is simplv because^ a speed
;;t"t"."-iru
a severe diaglncreaie gnd a consequent waste of energy'
i"".au."
".ut"a the landin[ gear and wir:g flaps on final approach as
b';t;.6;ai;s
lat€ a3 salely pracf,rcal.
Original lssue
4-51 (4-52 blank)
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
sEcroN
5
PERFORMANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION
TECHNIQUE
SAMPLE FLIGHT
Airplane Configuration . .
Takeoff Airport Conditions
Cruise Conditions
LandingAirportConditions
5-3
5-3
5-7
5-7
.....
Sample Performance Limitations
Sample Calculations ... .
o-l
5-8
CHARTS AND GRAPHS
Figure
5-1 ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE TAKEOFF FLIGHT
..........5-6
PATH..
........5-17
5-2 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
,.,....5.18
5-3 ALTIMETER CORRECTION
5-4 TEMPERATURE RISE DUE TO RAM RECOVERY . . . . 5.19
5-5 TEMPERATURE CONVERSION FROM
......5.20
FAHRENHEIT TO CELSIUS
5-6 ISA CONVERSION AND OPERATING
5-21
TEMPERATURE LIMITS
5.7 PRESSURE CONVERSION - INCHES OF
5-22
MERCURY TO MILLIBARS
5-23
5-8 STALL SPEEDS
5-24
^ - 5-e WIND COMPONENT . .
.
-
.
s-ro
5-25
MINIMUM ENGINE ToRQUE FoR TAKEoFF
TO
ACHIEVE
5-11 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT
TAKEOFF CLIMB REQUIREMENTS .,,.... 5-26
5-12 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT AS PERMITTED
....5-28
BY FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED
BY
AS
DETERMINED
TAKEOFF
LIMIT
MAXIMUM
5-13
THE DEMONSTRATED BRAKE ENERGY LIMIT . . . . 5.31
5.14 TAKEOFF DISTANCE
5-15 ACCELERATE GO DISTANCE
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
.....5-32
.....5.40
5-1
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Figure
5.16 CLIMB GRAD IENT AT V, - ONE
ENGINE
INOPERATIVE
,....,,...5-42
5-1? RATE-OF-CLIMB - ALL ENGINES OPERATING
(FLAPS -T.O.) ...
.....,..5-43
5.18 RATE-OF-CLIMB - ALL ENGINES OPERATING
(FLAPS - UP)(MAXIMUM CLIMB) .
........5-44
5-19 RATE-OF-CLIMB - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE .... 5.45
5-20 RATE-OF-CLIMB - BALKED LANDING CLIMB ...... 5-46
5-21 SERVICE CEILING - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE . . . 5-47
5-22 TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB - MAXIMUM
.........5-48
CLIMB .
CRUISE
5-23 TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB
.........5-49
CLIMB .
(1900
. . . . 5-50
POWER
RPM)
5-24 MAXTMUM CRUISE
(1800
. . . . 5-58
RPM)
POWER
5-25 MAXTMUM CRUISE
(1700
. . . . 5-66
POWER
RPM)
CRUISE
5-26 MAXIMUM
(T600
. . . . 5-74
POWER
RPM)
5.2? MAXIMUM CRUISE
CRUISE
PERFORMANCE
5-28 MAXIMUM RANGE
5-82
(1900 RPM)
5.29
MAXIMUM RANGE CRUISE PERFORMANCE
(1600
RPM)
......5-90
5-30 MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER FUEL REQUIRED . . . . . . 5-98
........5-99
5-31 RANGE PROFILE
.. 5-1OO
5-32 ENDURANCE PROFILE
.......5-101
5-33 HOLDING TIME .
5-34 TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO DESCEND ....... 5.102
5-35 LANDING FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED . . . . 5.103
....5-104
5-36 LANDING DISTANCE
5-2
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
MODEL 406
sEcTloN 5
PERFORI\4ANCE
INTRODUCTION
Section 5 contains all the performance limitations and information
tud,*a to op"*te the airplani safely- and to-help you plan your flighk
in detail with reasonable accuracy' Sale and precse operalron oI Lne
t.quit". the pilot to be thoroughly familiar with and understand
"i-t"""
thi data an-d calculatibns of this section.
,
-t"
The data on these graphical and tabular -charts have bee-n com..piled
tesLsl with the airplane and engines in good condition,
irom actuat flieht
"pitot
techniques. Note that the cruise peiformance data
".itislt"t"s"
for wiid and/or navigational errors. Allowances for
no
A"to*"tt"u
--JErt"ti. takeoff, climb,
descent and 45 ninutes reserve at the- particl.t"tt.
the
6. c;"G power and altitude are provided in the mnge profile chart,
chart and the'maximum cruise [o*er fuel required
"nauia"""'p.oru
chatf,,
All oerformance, range and endurance charts are based on the use of
jet fuei with nominal fuel density of 6.70 pounds per gallon'
Refer to the following figures for operating weight limits:
1. Maximum Takeoff Weight To Achieve Takeoff Climb Requirements
2. Maximum Takeoff Weight As Permitted By The Field Length
Required
3. Maximun Takeoff Weight Limit As Deternined Bv The Demonstrat€d Bra}e EnergY Limit
4. Landing Field Length Required
TECHNIQUE
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE
,A
Information in this section is presentcd for the purpose of compliance
with the appropriate performance criteria and certification requirements
of SFAR 41.
STANDARD PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
All nerformance in this manual is based on flight test data and the
followiirg conditions:
1. Power ratings include the installation, bleed
air aad
accessory
losses.
2. Full temperature accountability within the operational limits for
which th6 airplane is certified.
Original lssue
c-J
sEcroN
5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
NOTE
ShouLd aLtitude be below the lowest altltude
shown on the performance charts, use the performance at the Loutest ualue shown.
3. Wing flap positions
as follows:
MODE
FLAP HANDLE POSITION
FLAP ANGLE
T.0.
100
TAKEOFF
ENROUTE
APPROACH
LANDING
0'
UP
20.
30"
LAND
4. All takeoff and landing performance is based on a paved, dry
runway.
5. The takeoff performance was obtainied using the following procedures and conditions:
Accelerate Go/Takeoff Flight Path
a. The autofeather was armed.
b. Two engine power was set static to the setting corresponding to
fisure 5:10 and then the brakes were released. Power was reset
aJ required prior to 80 KIAS if it exceeded 1350 foot-pounds.
c. The engine has failed just prior to Vr in that the pilot
d.
nized the failure at Vy.
At Vu, the airplane was rotated
to
Tonose up
recog-
pitch attitude and
heading with the
wings level until reaching 400 feet.
e. The landing gear was retracted when a positive climb rate was
f.
g.
-
ruddii
was aiplied as required
to maintain
established.
V2 was maintained from the 50 lbot point above the runway to
400 feet above ground level (AGL). Power adjustments were not
made from 80 KIAS until reaching 400 feet AGL.
The aimlane was then accelerated to Vyss at which time the
flaps were retracted and the throttle was adjusted to torque or
ITT lirnit. The airplane was trimmed and 3o bank was established with an apbroximate 1/2 ball slip into the operative
ensine indicated on the turn and bank indicator. The climb was
then continued to 1000 feet AGL.
Accelerate Stop (Refer to Figure 5-12)
a. The autofeather was armed
b. Two engine power was set static to the setting corresponding to
fisure 5:10 and then the brakes were released. Power was reset
aJ required prior to 80 KIAS if it exceeded 1350 foot-pounds.
c. The engine has failed just prior to V1 in that the pilot
recog-
nized the failure at V1.
c-+
1 June 1987
SECTION 5
PERFORI,,IANCE
MODEL 406
d. Both power levers were brought to flight idle ai Vr.
e. Maximum effective braking was started immediately after the
power levers were brought to flight idle and continued until the
airplane came to a stop.
TIOTE
Maximum up eLeuator, uithout allowing the air
pLane to become airborne, aLLows maximum
brahing eff ectiuene s s.
Multiengine Takeoff
a, The autofeather was armed
b. The power was set prior to brake release to the setting corresponding to figure 5-10 and then the brakes were released.
Power was reset as required prior to 80 KIAS if it exceeded
1350 foot-pounds.
c. Positive rotation was made at Vp, increasing the pitch attitude
by Toand achieving the 50 foot obstacle speed given in Figure
5- 14.
d, The landing
gear was retracted when a positive rate of climb
was established.
Landing
Landing was preceded by a steady three degree angle of approach down to the 50 foot height with airspeed at Vqs6 wiih
flaps in the landing position and the landing gear was extended.
b. Power was adjusted as required to maintain the three degree
approach angle at Vpse at 50 foot point.
c. At 50 feet, a gradual power reduction was initiated.
d. Sink was slightly arrested, the power levers were fully retarded
lo flighl idle and a firm touchdown was accomplished. The
power Jevers remained at flight idle until the airplane had
a.
stopped.
Maximum effective braking was initiated immediately and continued throughout the landlng roll.
I. The control wheel was held full aft to keep all the weight on
the main wheels.
e.
1 June 1987
5-51
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
-TAKEOFF
MODEL 406
,/T
POWER SET
:TAKEOFF POWER ADJUSTED
POWER SET
YI
_
tl
I
1000 FEET
FEET
I
Figure 6-1
One Engine Inoperative Takeoff Flight Path
c-o
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
SAMPLE FLIGHT
The following is an example of a typical flight using the performance
data contained in Figures 5-8 through 5-36. The approximation method
is used in tabular performalce except where noted.
AIRPLAI,..iE CONFIGURATION
Airplane Ramp Weight .
Airplane Weight at Takeoff
Usable Fuel Load . . .
^
.
.....
....
.
.
9075 Pounds
9000 Pounds
2000 Pounds
TAKEoFF AIRPoRT coNDtnoNs
Length
Temperature
Field
Field Pressure Altitude
Wind . . .
7200 Feet (Runway 23)
Degrees Celsius
......16
.
.
Obstacles
-..
.270
....
2400Feet
at 25 Knots
degrees
....
None
CRUISE CONDITIONS
Distarce
Cruise Altitude
Temperature
Wind...
Power . .
600 Nautical Miles
. . 10,000 Feet
-15 degrees Celsius (ISA -10 Degrees Celsius)
15 Knot Tailwind
..
Maximurn Recommended Cruise Power
LANDING AIRPORT CONOITIONS
_
Field kngth
Temperature .....
Field Pressure Altitude
Wind . . .
Landing Weight
.
.
.
.. ..
Obstacles
4000 Feet (Runway 19)
TDegrees Celsius
....
270 Degrees
1?00Feet
At
1? Knots
.... To Be Calculated
..... 50-Foot Trees
SAMPLE PERFORMANCE LIMITATIONS
(1) Minimum Engine Torque For Takeoff
(Refer to example on Figure 5-10) - 1350 Foot-Pounds
(2) Maximum Takeoff Weight To Achieve Takeoff Climb Requrrements
(Refer to example on Figure 5-11)
Original lssue
-
9360 Pounds
5-7
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
(3) Maximum Takeoff Weight As Permitted By The Field
Length Required
(Refer to eiample on Figure 5-12)
available field length
-
Not weight limited bv
(4) Maximum Takeoff Weight As Determined Bv The
onstrated Brake Enercv Limits
(Refer to example on"- Figure 5-13 Example
1) -
DemAbove
9360 Pounds
(5)
Lensth Required
- Landine[oField
example"on Fi$rre 5-36)
tn"fe"
-
3900 feet
with wind
cor"rection
SAMPLE CALCULATIONS
Wind Component (Figure 5-9)
(1) The angle between the runway and the prevailing wind is
40 degrees.
(2) Enter Figure 5-9 on the 40 degrees wind line and proceed
out to th; intersection with the 25-knot arc'
(3) Read horizontally left from this intersection; the headwind
component is 19 knots.
Takeoff Distance (Figure 5'14)
(1)
Fizure 5-14 at 9360 pounds weight; the 50-foot ob' Enter
stacle sDe;d is 102 KIAS.
(2) Proceed horizontally right from 3000-foot- pressure altitude
'-'
columns"for 20 degrees Cels:ius The takeoff
ltt"
is 2588 feet and the total distance reqrired to
*o""a """ti"ut
to
iiear a ^"
50-foot obstacle is 3164 feet without wind correcthe correct€d
ii;;. witi-t ; 1g-knot headwind compon-ent,corrected
total
Gfeoff gtound run is 2365 feet and the
distance required is 2892 feet.
19 knots
lrea4wind
l0 knots headwrnd
Corrected takeoff
iround
5-d
run
:
:
:
(4.b percent)
:8.6
percent
2588 feet
- [8.6 percent (2588 feet)]
2588 feet
-
1223 teet\
2365 feet
Original lssue
MODEL 406
"ERFsoE"cJlotl[E
Corrected total
distance required
:3164 feet - [8.6 percent
:
:
3164 feet
-
1272
(3164 feet)l
teetl
2892 feet
Accelerate Stop Distance (Figure 5-12)
(1) Enter Figue 5-12
2400 feet altitude and 16 degrees
at
Celsius.
(2)
horizontally to right to weight refere-nce.line Move
' Proceed
down weight line fo 9000 pounds. -Proceed horizontally to
rieht to wlnd reference line. Proceed down headwind line to
19 knots wind component.
(3)
Proceed horizontally to right to weig,ht line. The accelerate-
stop distance required is 3970 feet.
Accelerate Go Distance (Figure 5'15)
(1) Enter Figure 5-15 at 9360 pounds weight; rotation
(2)
'
speed is
98 KIAS.
Proceed horizontally right from 3000-foot lresgYre altitude
to the vertical columns-for 20 degrees Celsius' The distance
reouired to clear a 50-foot obstacle, after rotating at 98
KIAS, is 5652 feet without wind correction. With- a 19-knot
headwind component, the distance can be reduced by:
lg knots L-^r--.:-r
,=____=__i:s:I++
lu knols neaowrno
Corrected accelerate
go
distance
:5652
:
:
9.5 percent
feet - [9 5 percent (5652 feet)]
5652 feet
:5115
(b percent)
- [537 feet]
feet
M)TE
ol the acceLerate go disLonce.
can be obtalned using the ,nterpoLatrcn method
if the distance required' ualue from the approxiA more eaact ualue
mation method is too
Original lssue
Larae.
5-V
sEcloN
5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
Rate-ot-Climb - All Engines Operating (Figures 5-17 and 5-18)
(1) Enter Figure 5-18 at 16 degrees Celsius.
(2) Proceed vertically up to the 2400-foot pressure altitude line.
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the reference line. Follow the
slope of the adjacent rat€-of-climb lines until intersecting
the vertical 9000-pound line.
(4) Proceed horizontally right to obtain rate-of-climb.
(1600
Feet per minute)
(5) The climb
speed for all conditions is
-
109 KIAS.
Rate-Of-Climb - One Engine Inoperative (Figure 5-19)
'
(1) Enter Figure 5-19 at 16 degrees Celsius.
(2) Proceed vertically up to the 2400-foot pressure altitude line.
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the reference line. Follow the
slope of the adjacent rate-of-climb lines until intersecting
the vertical 9000-pound line.
(4) Proceed horizontally right to obtain rate-of-climb. (410 feet
per mrnule,
(5) The climb
speed
is 108 KIAS.
Time, Fuel And Distance To Climb - Cruise Climb (Figure 5-23)
Time, fuel and distance to climb are determined by frnding the
difference between the airport and the cmise conditions; thus, two
calculations are required, one for the airport condition and the second
for the cruise condition.
Airport Condition:
(1) Enter Figure 5-23 at 16 degrees Celsius.
(2) Proceed vertically up to 2400-foot pressure altitude line.
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the 9000-pound line.
(4) Proceed vertically down to obtain time to climb (1.4 minutes), fuel to climb (20 pounds) and distance io climb (3
nautical miles).
5-10
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PEBFORMANCE
MODEL 406
Cruise Condition:
(5) Enter Figure 5-23 at -15 degrees Celsius.
(6) Proceed vertically up to 10,000-foot pressure altitude line.
(?) Proceed horizontally right to the 9000-pound line.
(8)
verticallv down to obtain time to climb (5.9 min' Proceed
utes), tuel to cliirb (6? pounds) and distance to climb (15
nautical miles).
Final calculations:
Time to climb
:
Cruise time to climb -
:
5.9 minut€s
:4.5
Fuel to
climb
Distance to
climb
atport time to
climb
:
:
:
:
- 1.4 minutes
minutes
Cruise fuel to climb - airport fuel to climb
67 Pounds - 20 Pounds
4? pounds (add ?5 pounds for star{, taxi
and takeofO (122 Pbunds total)
Cruise distance to
clinb - airport
distance
to climb
:
:
15 nautical miles - 3 nautical mileg
12 nautical miles
Adjusted for wind (use 60 percent of the
wind at altitude for climb wind),
:
:
:
-
a wind contribution
m+gt€s (0.6 x 15 knots)l
rz + |- 4lq
ttu mrnur€s
12 nautical miles
12 nautical miles
*
0.7 nautical miles
12.7 nautical miles
Time, Fuel And Distance To Descend (Figure 5-34)
Time. fuel and distance to descend are determined by finding the
difference between the cruise and the landing airport conditions; thus
two calculations are required, one for the cruise condition and the second
for the landing airport condition.
Original lssue
5-11
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
Cruise Condition:
(1) Enter Figure 5-34 at the cruise altitude of 10,000 feet.
(2) Proceed horizontally right to the guideline.
(3) Proceed vertically down to obtain time to descend (13.3
minutes), fuel to descend (99 pounds) and distance to descend (43 nautical miles).
Landing Airport Conditionr
(4) Enter Figure 5-34 at the airport altitude of 1700 feet.
(5) Proceed horizontally right to the guideline.
(6) Proceed vertically down to obtain time to descend (2.0
minutes), fuel to descend (19 pounds) and distance to descend (7.0 nautical miles).
Finai Calculations:
Time to
descend :
Cruise time to descend - airport time to
descend
Fuel to
descend
:
:
:
13.3 minutes
- 2.0 minutes
11.3 minutes
Cruise fuel to descend - airport fuel to
descend
:
:
Distance to descend :
:
:
99 pounds
-
19 Pounds
80 Pounds
Cruise distance to descend - airport
distance to descend.
43 nautical miles - 7 nautical miles
36 nautical miles
Adjusted for wind (use 40 percent of the
wind at altitude for descent wind),
:
:
36 + wind contribution
(0.4 x 15 knoLs)l
+ t- lljltit minutes
mr.nutes
:36 nautical miles * 1.1 nautical miles
: 37.1 nautical miles
5-12
96
Original lssue
sEcTloN 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
Maximum Recommended Cruise Power (Figure 5'24)
The approximation method for extracling. dala from the cruise tables
temperature and altitude values, which are
generally conservative with respect to fuel economy.
(1) Enter the ISA -10 desrees Celsius data for Maximum Rec' ommended Cruise Pdwer (1900 RPM) at an altitude of
is to seli,it the next lower
10,000 feet.
(2) Use the higher weight of 9360 pounds. The airspeed is
KTAS and the total fuel flow is 605 pounds per hour.
232
(3) Correcting for a weight of 9000 pounds, the airspeed increaseg to:
. -' i KTAS ut - KTAS atl
lower higher
rubu pounos
I| |I weight werght ll:
weight L
232 KTAS -[9!9q!9g$::-999q-p9qd" I lzes xres - 232 KrAS] :
l0tt0 Pounds
I
L
at .. . .
the higher +l(hrgher
Airsneed
232
KTAS +
0.3
wqlg-hJ
.
- rhglt werght
KTAS :232.3 KTAS
method may be used for interpolating altitude and
The intemolation
-to
obtain performance data closer to the actual conditions.
temperature
In the above calculations, for convenience, the weight was assuned to
be eoual to the takeoff weight of 9000 pounds. More realistic data can be
detenmined if the average cruise weight is used. This average cruise
weight is determined as follows:
Cruise
fuel
-
Total - climb - descent
distance distance distance
true t
airspeed
wind
correction
x [total fuel flow per hour]
37.1
12.0
600
- nautical - nautical
miles rniles miles
232.4 KTAS * 15 knot tailwind
Nautical
x [605 pounds per hour]
- 550'9-ngutigal miles x 605 oounds per hour
:
:
247.4 knots
2.23 hours x 605 pounds per hour
1349 pounds
Original lssue
5-13
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
Average
crurse:
weight
Starting weight - start, taxi and climb fuel
-
Cruise
fuel
2
:90?5
:8279
pounds
-
122 pounds
founds
-
l34glounds
2
Average
cruse
speed : True airspeed (refer to Figure 5-30) t weight correction
: 282 KTAS * 9360 pour.rd-s_- 8279pounds (233 _ 282 KTAS)
:
:
1060 pounds
232 KTAS
+
1.0 KTAS
233 KTAS
Average
ground
speed :
233
KTAS
*
tailwind
:
233
KTAS
+
15 knots
:248 knots
Distance
durins
cruisd : Total distance
:600-12-37.1
:
- climb distance - descent distance
550.9 nautical miles
Time
during
cruise distance
ground speed
:550.9
:
5-14
248
2.22 hours
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
Landing Distance (Figure 5'36)
Landing weight
:
Startine weieht - st€rt, taxi and climb
fuel - cirise fuel - descent fuel
:90?5
pounds
1349 pounds
:
-
122 Pounds 80 Pounds
7524 pounds
:210
decrees at 17 knots. Determrne
headwiird compon€nt (refer to Figure 5-9)
(16 knols headwind)
Wind
Enter Fizure 5-36 at 8300 pounds; the approach. speed is 100 IAS'
p.i"""a' ft--"ir"tt"tiy .iint fro"i 2000-foot pressure. altitude to the vertii;i;;1il; f- io ii"giee. Celsius. The lai'rding distan^ce- ground roll is
f""'f-i,tia- ttte totil distance required to clear a 5-0-foot obstacle is
comp-onent,
iofs f""t ;ithout wind correction' With a 16-knot headwind
;i;"";;;"fi- ct;urra ioii aitt"tt"" is 1311 feet and the conected total
iizs
distance required is 2446 feet.
16 knots
l0Tiok
Conected landing
g."""a
i"U
:
hea4wln4 {5 Dercent) :g.0 percent
headwin
7425 feet
- [8.0 percent (1425)]
1425 feet
- 114 feet
:1311
Corrected total
distance required
:
feet
2659 - [8.0 percent (2659)]
:2659 feet - 213 feet
:
2446 feet
Rate-Ot-Climb - Balked Landing Climb (Figute 5-20)
(1) Enter Figure 5-20 at 7 degrees Celsius.
(Z; e.oceed vertically up to the 1700-foot pressure altitude line'
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the weight reference line'
Follow the zuidelines up and to the ri8ht untll rnterslecf,rng
-?524-pound weight line.
the vertical
(4) Proceed horizontally right to determine the rate-of-climb'
(1600 feet per minute)
Climb speed :100 KIAS for all weights and altitudes.
Original lssue
5-15
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
'r,^rot fi,ot rod,lir-n
(without holding fuel)
:
:
:
Start, taxi and climb fuel
-r cruise fuel * descent fuel
122 pounds -F 1349 pounds
*
80 pounds
1551 pounds
Holding Time (Figure 5-33)
The holding fuel required for 45 minutes at 10,000 feet is as follows:
(1) Enter Figure 5-33 at 0.75 hours.
(2) Proceed horizontally right to the altitude guideline of
10,000 feet.
(3) Proceed vertically downward
required (226 pounds;.
Total fuel required
(with 45 minutes
holding
fuel)
:
:
:
to obtain the
holding fuel
Total tuel required without holding tuel
* holding fuel required for 45 minutes.
1551 pounds
*
226 pounds
1777 pounds
, ,To determine holding time, the fuel available for
holding must be
oelermlneo.
Fuel
available
for
holding
:
:
:
Initial fuel ' start, taxi and climb
fuel - cruise fuel - descent fuel
2000 pounds - 122 pounds
1349 pounds - 80 pounds
449 pounds
(1) Enter Figure 5-33 at 449 pounds of fuel available.
(2) Proceed vertically up to the intersection with the guideline
for 10,000 feet.
(3) Proceed horizontally left to obtain holding time available.
(1.5 hours)
5-16
Original lssue
MODEL
SECTION 5
PERFoRMANoE
406
NOTE:
1.
2.
lndicated Airspeed Assumes
Zero Instrumeni Elror.
The Following Calibrations
Are Not valid ln Prestall
Bullet.
FLIGHT CALIBRATION
GEAR . UP
FLAPS . UP
KIAS
GEAR
.
UP or DOWN
FLAPS . T.O.
KCAS
GEAR . DOWN
FLAPS - APPR
GEAR . DOWN
FLAPS . LAND
KtAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
KtAS
82
92
82
1t1
80
90
100
110
100
110
80
90
100
110
120
roo
tiz
110
112
80
90
100
'| 10
120
121
120
121
120
120
140
160
180
141
161
181
141
140
160
180
200
220
201
140
160
180
200
139
158
178
198
229
230
101
't
61
181
201
200
91
140
160
1-80
KCAS
80
90
99
109
118
137
157
,!:
221
EXAMPLE:
Indicated Airspeed - 204 KIAS
Landing Gea. - Up
Flaps - Up
Calibrated Airspeed
'
205 KCAS
GROUND CALIBRATION
FLAPS . T,O.
KIAS
KCAS
60
70
80
90
100
63
73
'110
83
92
102
112
Figure 5-2
AIRSPEDD CALIBRATION
PILOT'S AND COPILOT'S SYSTEMS
Original lssue
5-17
SECTION 5
PERFOBMANCE
MODEL 406
NOTE:
1. lndicated airspeed and indicated altitude assume zero inskument elror'
2. Add co(eclion to indicated altlmeter reading to oblain corrected allitude
3. The following calibrations are valid lor the oilols and copilot s altimelsrs
'I5,0(X) FEET
SEA LEVEL
GEAR
FLAPS
UP
UP
DOWt{
T.O.
DOWN
APPR
KIAS
FEET
FFFT
FEET
14
13
'11
13
-2
80
90
100
110
120
140
160
180
200
220
6
DOWN
LAND
13
15
17
19
17
19
00wN
APPR
DOWN
LANO
FEET
FEET
FEET
23
20
17
10
26
20
-3
24
19
19
-14
1
-4
-10
't5
15
DOWN
T.O.
UP
UP
-9
-22
-18
-33
'41
10
-37
2
-6
-16
-6
-34
-28
20
20
23
23
42
-65
26
26
-50
29
29
":
21
34
229
3O,OOO FEET
DOWN
APPR
0owtl
T.O.
KIAS
I'EEI
I'EEI
FEET
80
38
n
90
34
17
-11
-23
GEAR
FLAPS
UP
UP
00wN
LAND
4
100
110
120
43
40
34
-26
32
35
32
-45
-58
140
160
180
200
34
39
u
39
44
44
50
50
-47
-88
-70
-84
-99
-109
-.
220
229
58
EXAMPLE :
Aksoeed - 160 KIAS.
lndicated Altitude - 12,000 Feel
Conliguration ' Gear Up And Flaps Up.
3pi;1;fr,t"5ff1i2
000 Feet
+ (2r) Feer
'
12,02r Fe€t.
Fieure 6-3
ALTIMETE_R CORRECTION
PILOT'S AND COPILOT'S SYSTEMS
5-18
Original lssue
sEcloN 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
5
s
=o
G
9T'o
o
6
4
6lo-
c
.
' 3slu 3un1vu3dw3r
Figure 5-4
TEMPERATURE RISE DUE TO RAM RECOVERY
Original
lssue
5-19
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
.l
a
o
I R^
a o
E
D8
,jj h
E
E
F
Figure 5-6
TEMPERATURD CONVERSION FROM FAHRENHEIT TO
CELSIUS
5-20
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFORMI\NCE
H
^U"^
E
F
UJ
Brs
0
-70 -60 -50 40 -30 -20 -10 0
10
OUTSIDE AIB TEMPERATURE.
20
'C
EXAMPLE:
Temoerature - 16 oeorees Celsius.
Pros;ure Allitude - 2{00 Feet.
Temperature
'
ISA +5 degrees Celsius.
Figure 6-6
ISA CONVERSION
AND OPERATING TEMPERATURE LIMITS
Original
lssue
5'21
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
1050
1040
1030
1020
co
=
1010
FF
FF
1000 FF
FF
TT
eeo FlFF
FF
s80
FF
tr
tr
11.
e70 FF
e6o FF
tr
r-r
950
El
a.00
28.00
29.50
30.00
PBESSUBE . INCHES OF MERCURY
EXAMPLE:
Pressure - 29.55 Inches
ol M€rcury.
Pressure - 1000.6 Millibars.
Figure 5-7
PRESSURE CONVERSION
INCIIES OF MERCURY TO MILLIBARS
5-22
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
CONDITIONS:
1.
Power Levers - Flight
PERFORMANCE
ldle.
NoTE:
1.
2.
l\,laximum altitude loss during a conventional stall
is 520 leet.
Maximum nose down pitch attitude and altitude loss
dunng recovgry from one engine inoperative stall per
FAB 23.205 are approximalely 7 degrees below the
horizon and 700 feet, respectively.
ANGLE.OF.EAI{K
WEIGHT
POUI{DS
9360
CONFIGURATION
0"
FLAPS
GEAR
UP
T.O.
APPR
UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
LAND
8300
UP
T.O.
APPR
LAND
7300
UP
T.O.
APPR
LAND
6300
UP
T.O.
APPR.
LAND,
UP
OOWN
DOWN
DOWN
KIAS
45'
30"
60"
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
'fi3
134
134
120
95
102
102
113
85
85
91
91
101
81
81
87
87
77
81
83
96
90
96
92
90
82
79
76
97
97
88
85
82
107
90
82
7q
74
UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
86
78
77
UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
81
74
72
88
85
80
98
94
88
't
01
120
115
107
115
109
107
98
94
127
127
116
1't6
112
112
90
105
107
86
78
92
92
102
'102
122
122
84
84
93
'|
77
83
83
79
8l
92
89
109
75
93
92
87
110
109
106
81
87
87
96
96
115
'|
75
81
81
74
74
80
80
88
106
105
78
80
6D
89
88
88
106
105
105
10
104
103
15
EXAMPLE:
Weight - 9000 Pounds.
Landinq Gear " LJp.
Wing Flaps - Up.
Angle-of-Bank - 15 Degrees.
Slall Speed - 96 KIAS.
Stall Speed - 96 KCAS.
Figure 6-8
STALL SPEEDS
Original lssue
5-23
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
NOTE
Demonstruted Crosswind Ve\ocity
(not a limttation).
is 20
hnots
F
o
z
;
iru
z)
(r
o
F
E
J'O
F
zl!
z
o
(L
:'o
ta
(.)
o
z
t
-10 --- - 01020304050
WIND COMPONENT PERPENDICULAR TO RUNWAY - KNOTS
55857021
-
EXAMPLE:
Wind Velocity - 25 Knots At An Angle Ol 40 Degrees'
Headwrnd Componeni
- 19 Knols
crosswind Component - 16 Knots
Ficure 6-0
WIND COMPONENT
J-21
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFOBMANCE
MODEL 406
19OO RPM
CONDITIONS:
1.
2.
3.
NOTESI
Airspeed - 0 to 80 KIAS.
Inenial Separators - Normal.
Heater - As Noted.
1
.
2.
3.
4.
----
Above 80 KIAS allow torqu€ to increase not to
exceed 1382 foot-pounds or ITT limit
The torque indicaled below is the minimum value
for which takeoff performance in this section
can be obtained.
Forque on this chart shall be achieved without
exceeding 725 degrees Celsius ITT or 101.690 No.
For op€raton with inerl8l separator in byoass, aAd
5 degr€es Celsius to the actual oulsrds dii
temperature before entering graph.
Heater - ON
' OFF
Heater
-
'14
zo
-
+13
F
o
o
'12
o
tc
o.
Flo
z
z
=
-20 -10 0
10 20 30 40
50
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. "C
EXAMPLE:
Oulsrde Air Temperature - l6 Deqre€s Celstus.
Pressure Altitude - 2400 Feet.
Minimum Engine Torque Acceptabte Durjng cround Run - 1350 Foot_pounds.
Figure 5-10
MINIMUM ENGINE TORQUE FOR TAKEOFF
Original lssue
5-25
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
INERTIAL SEPARATORS - NORMAL
NOTE:
1.
----
Use dashed lines fol takeofJ with heater on.
Heater - ON
Heatgr - OFF
-
z
-
80,
F
!
g
=
7s6
ut
l.^
=
|," =i
t>
+o -ro o
10 20 30 40
OUTSIDE AtR TEMPERATURE
50
- 'C
EXAMPLE:
Heater - Oft.
Outside Air lemperature - 16 oegrees Celsius
Pressure Altitude - 2400 Feet.
Maximum Taheotf weighl - 9360 Pounds.
Ficrure 5-ll (Sheet I' of 2)
MAXIMUM fNTNONN WEIGHT TO ACHIEVE
TAKEOFF CLIMB REQUIREMENTS
5-26
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
INERTIAL SEPARATORS
.
BYPASS
853
zf,
80
,'
t
Iul
3
75ts
70{=
-30 -20 -10 0
lo 20
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
-J--r-J--L.r!_J_r.r_I 60
30
. 'C
,o 50
60
60856039
Figure 5-11 (Sheet 2 of 2)
MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEICHT TO ACIIIEVE
TAKEOFF CLIMB REQUIREMENTS
Original lssue
c-zl
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
rffl
0001 F@
ofulnoSu HreNf-] 0-llll
;
R
fR Z^^
r- =dz
- >Y
9I
FI
dl
o
()
!
5
o
v
€
o)
J
6Z
N=)
.=
E
b:
o
8F
=
e9
op
!c
=
o
z
.9
o
cc
o
F
a3
9< F
..e
t
o-
lu o
oz
J
sF
E,
uJ
z
c
5
5
s,)
ea
.ry9>
*-a
u.l
-e
N
E
l
-
doe > F
>9E {, t;
3e Fq€Eij E
e9 -T;Y Pa
q eE aE a.a€
Ee
6;vt
OPP
(oin.
-r^o
I 3*3
S
Ao E6
z 9{;I geE "i€
9 3* ";.96 Ei
6() E_a H', ;.9
t
- E-=
6iri+o@
zo ,j
="sts
ztL
oo
tl
lt
Figure 6-12 (Sheet I of 2)
MAXIMUM rrxnoFr wErcHT AS PEEMTTTED
BY FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED
(ACCELERATE STOP DISTANCE)
5-28
Original lssue
SECTION 5
l33l
PERFORMANCE
000t -
6lurnolu
H1eN3-l 0-]]E
F
z
lR za99
6il
H. =d>
->!.
H- o
I
e
Co
-9
O
8
P.>
o
.E
E
^ E;
o
;o
<
;€
.-. Y E.E
ao
ez
g) €o
PF
tl.t
=
cb
,
t9H
a6
-
;:
"9E
Eg
z.
ae!
>
dl
EE
E€
' ..e
o
r^EE
Gni
o>
F
!JO
tz
a
E
^a
o-a
o .q
o
".!
HF+Tffi
(E Eo= >. I
;ifi+#F+ffifF;]
6 ^
le
IJJ
oo
d#e
ffiffi
tr ss; E i
.-.2:EU;;.1
E5g?_a
;gE
lq
.!:g:SB€
I:
eflcr.iEEg ;9:
E € 3lE
-.^
=
T€F:rs
fEfata*ss 3 - e"glg
,s 6ts |5-
-;SEiiriilJ
=
=E
Fn: F'- 5,
.-"r- =;s
i'=$:':siEEe
iSEF-sdg lef
Ud
|
- Figure 6-12 (Sheet 2 of 2)
MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT AS PERMITTED
BY FIELD LENGTII REQUIRED
(ACCELERATE STOP DISTANCE)
Original lssue
5-29 (5-30 blank)
SFAR 41
MODEL 406
sEcTroN 5
PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS:
1.
2.
3.
Wing Flaps - T.0.
Ground ldle and Maximum Effective Braking at Vl
Level, Hard Surface, Dry Runway.
50
40
930
tt
20
F
< r^
E'w
>n
T-to
2-zo
tr
o
-30
-40
-50
iiz
o.
ca!
z=
l|',
f
-t
EXA[,{PLEi
1.
Pressure Altitude - 2400 Feel.
Outside Air Temperature - 16 Deqrees Cetsrus.
Wrnd - 19 Knot Headwind Compo-nent.
Brake Energy Takeofl Weight Limit - Above 9360 pounds.
CIhe Limding Wnd For Thrs Example ts 5 5 Knots Taitwind.)
2.
Pressure Aliitude - 12,000 Feet.
Outside Air Temperature - 0 Deqrees Cetsius.
Wind - 5 Knot Tailwind Comoon;nr.
Brake Energy Takeoff Weight Limit - 7000 Pounds.
Fieure 5-13
MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT LIMIT AS DETERMINED
BY THE DEMONSTRATED BRAKE ENERGY LIMIT
Original lssue
5-31
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
.g
E6
o9
58
!
sEgEan
J>
i;E
E
a'.9
a
E o=
E;; E
EdF
Ecdii
iiSE.B.
PbeP
+[sa
gP 3;5
Fi6 b
EE F?
: gaFa
sEgEas
a
.9
aPals
=iE
EEH
E
is
sEgEEe
€=
==
3=
T
E:;
:9e=
H3E?A
o q = 9."
EE€E$
P-ci<"j
z
e;s
=I
49
5U
gEEEan
'?ii
No
e;e
Pd,
.E i.
Ft'F
5eF
,
ie gE
s3i
<"9 A,P9 E EE
Ei3 -t
-:E o
.=
@E
E
3>
r-€
6
5 E:5
a
=
a 2;
gi, E
-iE E X
=
;_i6i.E
.",
6*
='
a*gFa
t5 45
!e
Ee
o- ga
>e
,
EeH*
E E1H
>=
:sr: E.q
EE
gE
6
2?
o
u:i
=r o
lsgr
t=ts
t*x
.:
3E:E
ittii
90!!
o
itt!i
sggEEu
t-6x
Z'.E
rt!rl
EEH
gbrag
9Y(5
FEaE
*EE-E
q :;
o
rHsEsn
=.9
6*=.e
Xo
H
F--
c;F
oq=c).?
8!5 E8
H-ciaj
z
*
OEE
F;
:
Prn
5Qr-
;
I-gFE
r.d s z;
'-
oi
s,E.€
aifr
Ei
i
F5sE3F€
pEssigEe
z-
i^^^^
Y5-55
' il
EE
h9F.?OE,9
a-
E
No*ra)@
f;EH=
>*
:- tt,
?52
gF
Figure 6-14 (Sheet 2 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
Original lssue
5-33
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORI,IANCE
g
o
oP
6n
rEgHan
Z\E
e !x
oolu
Ep;€
.s:; E
rEgEan
<-96
ii3q.
;3Et
;P8.[E:3
2",
b!
EKEb
rH:Eae
a=H
En*
a6bsa
a&
Eaa
rgqE
eu
(J
b8:aa
EE E€
E-;i
.:
Y'E
aR5$S
F
HsE=e
EdF
EE=€$
P;6i
z
aj
ragEAn
5
E;F
-E
E3
.E4 ;
5Qrut=u
>H I
e9
o?; :,
E
Ei
RKRHS
9S36b RA$S5
HE=EF 39Rg?
e
,F dt , ti
xx.9qqr=
; ef;qEE
F 3ae e.ee
I
zgSP'9E-=
+3
6=
=d
Ficure 5-14 (Sheet 3 of 8)
fAKEoFF DISTANCE
5-34
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
gEsErn
o
oP
5€
P
=9GE
.E=;
r.9
g
6ts
E
o
A@^^
E
Zits
liiii
oo!4
EX
ttiii
-
sEsEa*
E=E3
UBEE.
>@Ez
9 .,-
F: do
E!{;F
adH
tiiii
.iEEA
sai - ^
!2 X !;
g bE 5
rEiEan
tPlgt
:vE!:
RA9-,i
o q = 9?."
fi;e
EE=€8
o
z
H
.'i <'j
o
RRAAA Sgaaa
E;w
E
.E
rE:Egn
u,|....
q;
5 F9
F o
E
8>- E
6
E
2<)
56.
aifr
Ei
dqsee
-.5563--.r-
F
4E
3
F.
9-o .:.4-
831
b
z ;s9 :E
s F fi;3 IEE
t
z.
o
o
Original lssue
Effi*
>=
+a
a<
gF
Fieure 5-14 (Sheet 4 of 8)
'TAKEOFF DISTANCE
c-Jc
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
.g
Za
o
OE
sEgEan
b-
E:E*
9
:>
.=.=x
8,.
:96i6
U::E
o
t-6R
3E
*F
z,,
f,=iu
i(
.s
45549
Eeil
F=do
Pbeg
og sa
l
sEiEar
.9
o
qnEb
6.e 8,ii
i6;3I
6!=e
::; F
sfgEan
..If=tu
B8H
o q = a.=
o;5:r2
3 E;E3
g; "': .;
eEsEgr
z
5
EdF
.E=
>H ;g
x* a
6gi5
q
L.d
.l:
!?
5
^6
sil-
z;
Exj
Ul
e?, rE
3':ctE
;
E
I
PH
F.: v !!.y
a: &S{
o
N.t=
u3
i8
Figure 5-14 (Sheet 5 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
5-36
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
g
oP
P EX
:!.€
E:: E
;E E 5
P+ia8
tlt!l
sEgeEn
ttiii
!lit!
=ih
PPU
(,
sfsEee
--i9
FE -'+
x o!=
Jf X:b
-F=6-
Pbee
Z'.L
tilii
8eH
<,
i[sa
:i-o d
;N E q
F 3 xE
rfiEsn
iig 8E
E
-l3
:eg=
g
EEA
oq=q.:
EE=Ef;
H
P;6j.t
o
2
i!
.g! ;
>H Ia
^_:
',=
& q
.E
3*69Co:6dg=oo
u/rvt
or
h qF_ -?o 69
=;'"''6*
^- o o: o.o<
EEBgEEEE
o
zo
rasEAn
z\t
-:
qo$i!
T
_
EdF
c.J.9* f)@
H":
=QF
Ei
i^^^^
B=an6+
Fcg*
>=
tr3
6=
=d
Figure 5-14 (Sheet 6 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
Original lssue
5-37
sEcroN
5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
.=
o9
o
rEiEan
*on
e
EX
E;F
E;E*
o-
};;>.9 i
=.8
E
o
=
6=
gE
Fisure 6-14 (Sheet 7 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
5-38
Original lssue
sEcTtoN
MODEL 406
5
PERFORMANCE
:
tttll
gegEEn
sH'
bn
1 Jt-
: E:
E:ft€
d-=:
illii
BEH
E
:E
E5
*olz
E63E
<)
h-6E
rEsE6n
o
;3E:
riiii
e;F
F= 6o
P6!29
i[14
;cr'E g
gEbE
*EE.E
I i;
=.9
sEgEEu
6*=.e
=W
6q
=r!:
EF
be:l
BEE
3fiE4.5
AE= E$
H-"i.j
o
z
E
.E
.E
F
sEiEan
c;F
fl
HH
o$g
i6
eF
>-
>=F
G
F
F-99+
u6x
z esg :hq
u)
F
z, .
o
d*ess
-E666
3Fc!G'+
6
zi
;8
- 9f;
g;! .:.sad<
F
Fi
E
5;3
HEa*
>=
+3
6=
gE
Figure 6-14 (Sheet 8 of 8)
TAKEOF'F' DISTANCE
Original lssue
J-.tv
SFAR 41
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NOTEi
Takeoff Power Set - Refer To
Minimum Torque For Takeotl
Graoh Fioure t10.
Wina Fla-Ds - T.O.
Lev;I, Hdrd Surface.
Dry RunwaY
UOwr FEpS - 9pen.
Inertial Separator - Normal.
Heater - As Required.
Autofeather - Armed.
1. Engrne is assumed to lail iusl prior to VR.
2. tf till power is apDtigd w hout Drakes sa,
3.
4.
5.
dtsrance
apply trom point where tull power is achieved.
Decroase total distance 5 percent tor each 10 knots
h€adwind.
lncrease tolal distance 25 percent lor each'10 knots
tailwind,
With ingrtial soparator in bypass position add 1000 teet
to altitude b€loro sntering tgbles. ffhis relalonship
assumos that bypass is not used above 20 degrees
C€lsius.l
IOTAL DISTANCE TO CLEAR
SO.FOOT OBSTACTT
PRESSURE
ALTITUDE . iI'EIGHT
.
V2.
POUNDS
KIAS
KIAS
9360
98
102
.20"c '10'c
. FEET
10'c 20'c 30'c 40'c 50'c
2908
3132
3388
3678
4013
3151
3415 37M
3406 3704 4038
3698 4043 4445
4034 ,t446 4968
4439 4981
4025 ,$79
4424 4893
4921 5578
6654
6793 8914
496r 5726 5887
5724 6942
9283
7000
4419
4953
5698
8000
9000
9813
Sea Level
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
6921
9805
9748
i'
4827
5,18i]
7608
10.000
11,000
12,000
r 3.000
14,000
S€a Level
't 000
2000
3000
4000
8300
98
102
2276 2434 2579
2342 3121 3319 4090
259r
n49 3140 3345 JCOJ 5152
2762 2951 3150
3s94 4014 8389
2751 2946
3616 3880 4912
242
2581
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
2935
3147
3138
3368
3628
3934
4300
sti74 3638 3928 4256 5161
3939 4215 4682
3936 4297 4715 5850
€02 4744 5291
4753 5318 7423
10,000
4749 5326
r,000
6r63
1
12,000
13,000
14,000
6168
3380
3629
3908
4234 70o7
,:rt
1r
EXAMPLE:
Weight -
9C)00 Pounds.
Orrtside Air TemDerature - 16 D€ore€s C€lsius.
Pressure Altitudri - 24tJ0 Feet.
Headwind ComDonent - 19 Knots.
Distance To Accelerate Go lApproximation Msthod) - 5652 Fe€t (5115 Feet With Wnd
Correction).
Figure 5-15 (Sheet I of 2)
ACCELERATE GO DISTANCE
5-40
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
CONDITIONS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Takeoff Power Set - Refer To
Minimum Torque For Takeofl
Graoh Fiqule 510.
Wino Rabs - T.o
Lev6l, Hdrd surface,
Dry Runway
cowl Flaps - open.
Inertial Separato. - Normal.
Heater - As Required.
Autofeather - Armed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enoine is assumed to lail iusl pnor to vR
lf fill oower is aDplied withoul brakes set dislance
aoDlv from Do|nt \ihere full powe' is achieved
D&iease total distance 5 percent lor each 10 knots
headwind.
Increase total distance 25 porcent lor each 10 knois
tailwind.
With inertial separator in bypass position add 1000 feet
to altitude beiore entering tables. (This relationship
assumes that bypass is riot used above 20 degrees
Celsius.)
TOTAL DISTANCE TO CLEAR
sO.FOOT OBSTACLE - FEET
PRESSURE
ALTITUDE . WEIGHT
.
V2-
FEET
POUNDS
KIAS
KIAS
Sea Level
1000
7300
98
102
'20'c .10"c
1871
10'c 20"c 30"c 40'c 50'c
2372
2503
2W
2243 2377 2515
2239 2379 2523 2671
2375 2524 2681 2845
2521 2685 2855 3037
2660
2811
1992
2111
2116
2242
3000
4000
1982
2103
2231
2367
5000
2514 2681
2861
6000
7000
2677
2860
2854 3055
3053 3279
3277 3532
3056 3264
3276 3512
2000
8000
9000
3818 4169
4157 5034
4159 4746 627-2
4579 6097
38r 9
42.98
3019
3687
4376
5134
ro]'
5!13
5606
nTt
5711
1837
1942
2056
3000
4000
1828
1935
1737
1837
1944
2057
2181
5000
6000
2049 2178 2315
2175 2315 2463
2310 2462 2626
2460 2628 2807
2626 2810 3008
2457
2616
Sea Level
3251
3495
3988
3527 3804 4855
3813 4435 6716
3530
10,000
11,000
12,000
13,000
14,000
3049
3092
3530
3242 4138
2831
3085
3544
6300
1000
2000
7000
8000
9000
10,000
11,000
12,000
13,000
14,000
98
102
1542 1638
1631
'1727
1733
1834
2055
194r
1938
2050
2171
2149 2461
2162 2278 2761
2293 2485 ,110
2041
2178 2304 2435 2781
2311 2448 2602 3149
2607
2796 3111
3003 3590
3394
2903
3632
278/ 3314 4384
4268
3894
4813
6984
u:9'
3012 3252 3956 5436
3241 3734 4792 s2:2
3242 3600 4417
3515 4207
4075 5\27 8843
2809
3012
urt
Fieure 6-15 (Sheet 2 of 2)
ACCELERATE GO DISTANCE
Original lssue
c-+
|
sEc'noN
5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
6Fe9
=*
P -H'o*
i.E HE H
bes
EI
Ee_e:-
>
9;;.eE
E=F1O
3ii:-JE
i;EE.;
E"9AF=
[S
ofr.
=Hi"
;l
'i
.x
e5- X
.^o 'r8.9=
{.
a ' F*
>
H aB e&{
(') '
l-g
-_q
.;:r.ErEh
z:EP 9€€
o
.E
!r*
E
<
,li
3
FeF
&-n
d' s)
H gg" oa
a*
.!Ap EP
Y-*
,l;9 5 :
];89,-a 6E
6i
TEO
=E#s
Figure 5-18
RATE-OF-CLIMB - ALL ENGINES OPERATING
(FLAPS . UP) (MAXIMUM CLIMB)
5-44
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
or
3.tnNt!"r u3d
et3l @l - av{l-lc-lo-3J.vu
ra) s ,:: (t
.o
6
.
6l
- .^
-l-t-t-1-1-.1
F
(o 6
FS
sE
^9
;', E:
4 .EJ
sr
Z
F.9
F =6
EE
-9 _ur
E 3=,-*
s>f
E 6ts:
E -.; E;
,^,
'€
Ffl;F
5E;€e
;Hboor
E=Fs
o
<
Y
3€
=
e-.ee
EE€s; 5 e==
!;*l,iE ,EiPP
nEE-o;
E:EE
r- -#€*E
:tEE:.
]
EE#EE FHqq
z'Ea
<.-:,LZ
?iEEe' 6F
R
t
e9
65
;
g=
6 LR:
=JEE
9F+-ts *o
.'rt3g
^F
o t-o
o4F
q
o
ul
Fl
F
ott
o
IJJ
q;
F
=
N
oul
.?O.di
o
ul
6
9.=
? 5-Fn
uJ
oo
3
3S
g
6 Ao
E * E-=c€ -9
E +.
e€lpE:
5 EaEi
a:
s F.'^ n
'-6'=-€E ;:EE
Eigfl'ft
=o*.;.;+.;.;
3>
.!^.
g8; :1*i
5E
.:€ec€Ee
6i
H-
5c ,f€
,' '!
E.P
€=92
i"r
>,<
5eS
e=E =E9
t:5 n oI6
^
Figure 5-22
TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLIMB
5-48
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
!{R
-t
B
=F
o
F
)i5
nts z
F
2
6.4
=tR
.3-|-c
-d
I9+-la
. H+:
tr FE
t=
z
6
6
ai
F
?fi
t>
'o
r46
,qo
ax'
bE
.
.a !
-
5- ;s*E;:
if +-"g 3 gE:sgE;
Eg
-EigFg:
4F
:a
EEEga
EE€EE;
EFSEgEE ,,E€E€;E
("j + d(o 3
'6,
F
89
o)E
(J
.92
g
igE"=
H;9
6
.=
I
i?:
:s:
9
o,E
dF:
6
$Hgl
o
z
I
@ I
E*=g
€i3
8U9
gE*
9 oi
8F5
*Hss
|Jl
o
z
54
pE
@ g
EE==
s
OE
E9'
9Eiq
69:
x< 6
:>*;
9 oE
3F5
$$*;
UJ
o
z
5q
FIi
ko
(I
6
E;
0,:l g
!o2
@J o
a o
s)=f
i -:
-
.::.'D<63
aast.
jH6E
b
,;-=EL4;!^!-9(,)
6: FESEES
EO-ar=(J:r
o
zfNf)*o@N
o
P.o., a I
'i 5 + q! .?
=e
53'.
CT9'?YY
ja(+66
ul E lr-
Ei
ro
ES9
xn 6
:v:
a€t
sHgt
o
z
d9
Fi
=
F
CE
I
6b
alio g
-d.
q
oJ o
oEr.i;6
,:;.'f@ c
Eo!r
fE*€
9(:C
X= ti
Jvioi
9
df;
$H*s
o
z
Hg
Fri
F
.:6 _E;
a-r;
s:="-Eiq
.:='r<6x
Ho8 aaFt
j;-sg(,,
.; k;.Er L E h
FFs'E9,qEE
o
z-c\tr"s(oroFo
o
e!)
o"
EUr
rllETL
tri
+
Figure 5-24 (Sheet 6 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POVJER
(1900 RPM)
Original lssue
5-55
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
F
^o
62,
I
s
s
r9
3A
a
3
.F
oE
?-
.9(J
g
62
FO
s
5S.
:*;
:"t I
8Uo
:e;
3F5
r*ng
aat
$Hgt
o
z
Hq
Eri
d
a
F
=No<19
e 3t
dja 8,1, E
iE?-"{€
A
g:;,
. F*dB eest
-..-iEEu*r
k9
ihltl
r|'|E:TL
ZgtsEeEiX
P8E_E;3ee
9-r-i+;";;
o
(-)
<:+
Fisure 5-24 (Sheet 7 of 8)
MAiIMUM CRUISE POWER
(19OO RPM)
c-co
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
39
a:
g
HFESF
i
a2
3B
s
,F
6E
l-
I
89
F3
^e=
BB
36
oE
=
EF,
xs:I
HHRPF
E*=a
=@
6:A
x= 6
:vt
9 o<
3q9
3E5
$Hgs
3S5RR
o
z
:e
Fi
=
p
d:
-d. Ee;i
3:='
s.=
ir
.
eE
i?fE
E
Hd8 aaae
-f!= 6 6s!u)
EaL=
!
,
.;
a 3 *'ES:8fi
FO-Cr=():r
d
z-9994
janY-5b6
rrlETI
tri
*L
+
Figure 5-24 (Sheet 8 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISD POWER
(1900 RPM)
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
6Z
8e
3
89
33
=
6=
ic
a8
NO
?-
.=
Re&NS
8e
aaaaa
3
Eni;
!p=
:Fg
-6
6l
ol
r$F6
9tao
:s;
3E5
rl
o
z
ql
6
Hq
EE
Eo
6il d 6 - I
.: E13? € *
-ix6.
E_
'
s83{
. i!sff!29FEe=if;
;8E.s;3.Ef
9 r.i; +;.t;
o
Xd3
@ c
!bB
E*=g
69:
x: d
:ii
9 oi
6 ;-
$HH; 3S5Eg
'-:
o
z
5S
Er
F
E
-E
6
:
Sl-".
.i;
f-
?i
EeE
EE;?1E E
aaae
JRod
6 ^-g_!(/)
,t bE.<:*E b
9 g
E9d
3E9
99X
g*Pg
6flE
*Hea
9 oi
s
o
z
ee
Er
=
E
3--"I9
,
!E
dja
S.i,E
Xd 3
aas€
?E?-"*E*
eFe, , h:
..:9
df : =
FF"gEgEEE
9
o
t
.i.'i
+; ,.t;
eTi{q
994a9
E!)
o-
g3UJ
|lli:r!
IEJ
sP
FiEure 6-25 (Sheet 3 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(r8oo RPM)
5-60
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFOBMANCE
MODEL 406
!:
89
8A
:<
F
89
s3
=
.F
dE
*e
'
89
@6
.2
()
PB
g
:g
Eq'
e&eRR
Fa:
>@ I
qbd
.9:
x=d
:'i:
E$FE
3F€
$HHs
o
z
Hq
gf
E
I
d:
3:!
-d.
oJ o"
o g
96r ci; b 1
eE i?fE E
o=e
$.r96?a
@
Hu8 eaFe
jEoSSo'
5,.EEEEE
FO-O-r5(J:r
5tsUEr!
Ei
E
o
zF(!.fr*6(oFo
Figure 6-25 (Sheet 4 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1800 RPM)
Original lssue
5-61
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
{
a2
83
o-
=
F
89
8e
:9 E88
.Fj
6=
F3
F
r2
FO
@6
s
9E
=R.
!nE
PaaSa
g$tE
SEe
Eig
8U9
:si
Ee€
3EE
a
aaabS
$E*a
o
z.
ER6RA
d3
ts,r
qqi4{
9"
r6
c
n
ke
o'
db
-o =z
6J ci 6 o 9
t!'
;E:3€€s 5HaeFe !4 E!9
i!*3Sgff3 - c,r
3:3E$E$
tro.o--r>e:!
Io t
..i.; + ;..t
".-
33?33
-+
Fieure 5-26 (Sheet 5 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1800 RPM)
5-hz
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
89
3e
r9
33
.t-.-
6E
RHHHR
F
P&h$a
-<
ERRRR
3
89
o6
-9()
s
FO
3o
:g
=
ERRRR
=P
>t
q
x:
;v;
bt
Esnr abSaa
90-l
dl.:E
$Eet
z
34
a3a3a
FE
CE
6
.i;
.,d. e;!
fe
ct"
3=---.Eq=
eE
l?fE
E
aaae
(,
Zg+PPEIH
rHo3
6
-g-!
.;,=EL!t!=!
.
E3;_E;3ef
6
zFcrr(t*o@F.
o
o
tsENRP
EQ9EE
fi5n
UIEE
j-+6;d
Ei
<:+
Figure 5-25 (Sheet 6 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISD POWER
(1800 RPM)
Original lssue
5-63
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
39
83
s
89
o-
.F
6=
3
-o
6Z
o)E
.9()
FO
?a
:E
Eq'
c
XR:
g
odd
=6
s
g$FE
8U9
gs;
385
$HHa
'iii
o
z.
d9
R$SEg
Ei
Eo
Pii
:E
6b
I'
t33 a
(r=:
^:;5
'-E'=*{;8
gxa.
' 6"
H?3 44.4{
=F.N'YI
E9
ct'
8,), E
,.,i+ slili;;
Z I HE sEit
Ei
!o t t,'; +;.t *
H8E J=3
aaaaa EE
fClF
.E.E
ui-r!
GJ
<:+
Ficure 5-25 (Sheet 7 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1800 RPM)
c-o+
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
82 q
33
3
FPPF€
89 q
g
AR
.f-
i6E
2e
'
-9!
89
ra s
(J
oE
E3*
fpd:q
Ex=- aaaSa
>@ I
qbd
.q:
x= 6
::v:
9 oi
dfi
$fr*E
o
z
14a
*4
!Ei
aaRsg
tsu-
Eo
gr
6
x:
.=;
-6. . 3:i
s E:
3=3
eE i?fE E
(/i
HdB aaFt
j-E
q,SS@
H6.E**E i'
FFs'E9.BEE
o
Z-cros6(oF
o
k
-<>
ul'
.lUt
:'0F
6P9ee
rJJ-L
Ei
6b+
Figure 5-25 (Sheet 8 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(18OO RPM)
Original lssue
c-oc
sEcTtoN 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
ftE
39
83
aaSaa
3
F
6Z
o-
=
t-
dE
:s9aa 3AE53
E
s2
o6
9a)
.\ tt
FO
3
PP=8ts
E5;
.X
Agg
RE
gsP33
g
E*FE
o6d
=6
Fe8
x_=;
:;e
se5
c,
3EE
$HHs
=l
8l
EI
F,
6l
*eaa5
o
z.
ee
t
a
db
.=Z
!s |
sEu
EJ
! - *.;+;-;
(.)
Eo
a=
N?
oE, *.q
H€,9 ee*8€
a:^EEg.qEEI
9l
<-E
io
I 555"Y"r
9" | -----
HN
Pti;;
,;=
8l
a9a F;E
i-g?'"*€*
_"ie
ll
'l
EE
FA
IE
c,
I
-oF
I
+?sF+ qqE\E
;99 9P
9X:i i66
g€egg
el
*E
Q9
a
==
=q
=EP
E
€i | 6-9
I
d6q3
'.ji
=i6=
LI
Fieure 6-26 (Sheet 1 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1700 RPM)
f,-oo
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
F
^cl
i52
c
=
i
^cl
62
.t-
F
7e
=
6E
F
62
!r:t
FO
.3E
?q
()t
qF,
5:99&
=
F5i;
.F3E
>@ g
E;U
69:
Esrg
8F€
$fr*;
x= d
:;:
g g€
rli
z.
ee
FE
F
?fT
a
;@
.=:
6,q
.
l!)
o-
i
5H*
(,t t ltl
:E?+i€
3{E ce.Fe
.*ig pii;: J
E EESEEfi
6
ZF6l@ 3
E*rg adE68
*;T
o!p:'
x= d
:;*
:6.Y
dFi
E.
$EH;
sdggg
z
Hq
RPbAS
Er
t
RPS-=
!D
q ?!
.=:
.
6,9
-q
.Es
3=--
.E;TfE
@
=
C
Htdo'#+-'
as.F*
J-9
'
bEE*_:E
b
le
oH;
agb
r<||+q'
' '';5+
J
>Pqe9 t565t5 E 5t555E
frEH
E=
5 e e HE'aEE
Fo_o_J=o!r
!;
o
(.)
"r;
+.;..;
i
Figure 5-26 (Sheet 4 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1700 RPM)
Original lssue
5-69
SECTION 5
PERFOBMANCE
MODEL 406
89
3A
c
3
3
F
sE
=
at,
Fj
bL
a2
.24)
FO
o9
RHHHR
F
s
RRRRR aaas R
Fi
Eti;
P=
:6 E
'X
E$i6
6:d
i_?:
:s6
E*E
8E5
t!
o
z
HEeE
*aaft:
EEgSg €€€g$
gHg;H ggRRR a=a8F
-.,
=
CE
ae
Fri
sEESE aa83A
5q
AASPS | =F<"rP qP:&E
a
,
I=Z
6J.i
(D=l
JE
60P
: : X5
-:.E.' =*{E
gXA.
, A"S
Bg3 ag.fr{
..:9 fiii:
!2 6 e= -=E IP-
HHn
9 XVi5 E
o-
l'-'?\;
qqq\E
a
ES.EE.
a
3REB3 RftX&R-
HE*
+
*'i'f ril1,'#3{th3$F3i'?"
(1700 RPM)
5-70
Original lssue
sEcroN 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
3
89
8B
3
89
8F
:F
x',
:*
.4d
ot
F
89
qrt
FO
=
HHHHR
E5;
.E
aE
=(o9
E*=g
F;E
de:
x: d
:;:
peE
|ji
G.
de:
$H*E
33$Es
z
ee
Er
=
a
rO
e
F
*!
f _:
=;
tji a 8,1 E
.1!':*{€F
*dE aeFe
j-6
-SSo '
6
zFN('{r)(oF=EPEgEEe
o
N.o+oa
3r,
ul'
c lrl
.,-|Jl
;aaaa
rrr i: rr
IEJ
o
*L
+
Figure 5-26 (Sheet 8 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1700 RPM)
Original lssue
5-73
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
8e
83
F
o-
=
89
F
3B
bF
E2
82
.88
P
E,
=
3
FO
?a
8n:
E
=6
E;E
69:
x4 6
E$=5
3EE
$HHs
E
(.)
;sa
uJ
G
o
.b 2
EsPg
F;{
69:
x= 6
:YR
G,
8eE
3EE
$$gq
d'i
:aaag
o
z
Hq
Fr
=
ul
frEH
Y
9t(v6b6
gEEEg
a-
Ei
<:)
Fieure 5-27 (She€t 3 of 8)
MAXTMUM CRUISE PowER
(1600 RPM)
J-/O
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PEBFORMANCE
MODEL 406
3B
=
3B
o.
HHFPE
:a
s
Bg
a8
RFEEE
F
a9
,F
6
F
a2
FO
?(JP
F
=
'Fa
=a.,ts
>@ I
BAAA
s*Pa
ebE
-E:
gEP
P+6
E,
dEi
*HHg
R:8AA
z
5q
FE
F
.to
U]
e
-c
Pts
.=:
3==--
6.9
.
F
J d ,--EaAS€
-q(/, .
Ps,B
g$FEEEEe
9:.D *
('c,l
\: P ';.!+9q, Y
kq
o-
s E.=
;E:s€E
P
a3h
rr, E r!
E*
EPE9E
gHSEF
aaaa a
6
zFN.r*(o@F
Figure 6-27 (Sheet 4 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1600 RPM)
Original lssue
5-77
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
a2
8B
s
s9
83
=
-F
i6E
7e
asbSE
^o
6Z
oE
()
FO
.92
.tt
s
()9t
cE
cEi
=a-q
:6
E6d
aaEsa
g$FE
E60
*,=
;;6
6
G,
:o;
6PE
!!
o
z,
$HHs
_:
alaSE
RRRRR
Hg
EE
=
E
E.r
9o
E!.t
63
a
o-l
S,i, E
* 5H.
s=H
H?3 44.fr{
.*i9 gdd;; Ei
ie?="€€
gh6.
'6_
|| --*-=
(\r.{ f F
<{
I **--
I oFF-('r(D
F :'lrE
E8E5=8ee
6
zFNcr*()@Fo
*5665
g.E
.Eg-
a-
qlL-E
Ei
<:+
Figure 6-27 (Sheet 6 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1600 RPM)
Original lssue
5-79
SECIION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
39
F
8B
o.
r9
33
c
=
3
RF:AA
g
F
s9
^Q
o6
?o
.9 (J
RA
=
EN;
c
=6
6:6
860
Esrg
3EE
HHea
6;
e
o
z
ae
EE
=
E
=--qq
a
9
ti3 a
EE
iE?"{€ *
Hsg aaFe
."i9 ef f 1=
FFgEgEEE
!;
o,:;
3:,
A,i, E
+; o; *
frHr
xaa88
g.B.
.
.E
EEH
4<
o
+
Figure 5-27 (Sheet 7 of 8)
MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER
(1600 RPM)
c-ou
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
F
a2
3B
=
F
8e
8t
fj
dE
Eg
^
.88
2a
o*
o-
s
rg
F
RF
=
P!;
Eaeg
>=
z,
Err
o
o,
a).9
I
3
o
I
$FEE
9f
'6
$FEHE
}E?
eg
F
i-9
ui
2
o
=6
o
g
I
#leEE
a;-sE
F
dE
'E
E-- 8eE
51=-{ €g
R
d d d iia
I
o
E.5;5E;
o
5g
33PES
o
-!
tb
g>
F
.5
=9
k9
ul....
ao s9,9<
zt *p c=d€
Eo.
.=
$iEE
o
?5
g)
E6666
Ei
6E
Et-
.o{
:=
6-9
=.!
.9)
E
z
9r,9
=
de-iE
ddPS
P'
$iFH6
9;
g
B(]
z,
di
o
*iEg
.E
E
$FFHE
PF
=
E.
1z-
g:
{E-'--n
.:.,r ,5{EE
;i."EHE
3 Hq,e,8,frf
4t iE c=s€
6
zo
o
$FE6
F5;,i=i
ee
oH,n
aaaaa
o=w
Ei
o
<9-
Ficure 6-28 (Sheet 5of8)
MAXIMUM EANGE CRUISE PERFORMANCE
(1900 RPM)
5-60
Original lssue
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
2
o
s
{EiE
EdPS
dErHt
Ed-;9
E
Ei
>=
3,P
z.
o
a
g=-
s
dEi€
nlJbq
dtr*E
d d o-;9
=]
G^o
E5
P-
o
o
z
z,
-o
'6
s
dx+E
irFE
E
o
F
;:
9E
YX
Ir
z2;
t!a
F,;E
E
g,P
z,
s
d=+$
de
3;FB
g5
*iFH6
nb
5l
-6
z
o
o
z
s
dE3€
ddgS
.E
o
:
,9;
9E
=zd
d",:
.._o .=*{6E
(!E ' . ts*
33$€
jx H3
SoSSo '
dh=
o9
3'r-
o
z
-o
gE
t
9f
t
$IEE ab9F8 P3A&g
FFFHS
gY
RR&98 aRa6a
'6
E
}F
E
-9,
o
E.o
6e
=t
=6
z
o
o
z
t
'6
l?d
plE;l
'6
eeeee SSSHF
o
F
6
oi
.^.
nc=
<€ _o.
i.'€ € g
b6
J9
!4
3g&fr2
b< i
-=#9
E(rF 55€ei
o
s
*FMH6
gH-
Naa9
aE
>=
q9YTT
rrqrq9 qqq+F
=q
.E
tee ee
t:=
ag; .9
Fi
<9
o,rexr orur,[i€X"r€cuii23J$13$
(1600 RPM)
5-90
-a
6:
F
9"
Ir.r
o-
{:
o
>^-/<
=
if i$b.MA NcE
Original
sEcTtoN 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
I3
E
F8A9P
R&R
3AA
$FFH5
E
.Ei
^
$FE5
F
.z=
3,P
2
PE
E
t
q5
a$r
$FE;
E
a
$Ftr 3
3g
6-O
=6
fia9ea
cl
2
3
o
I
'6
B
6
o
F
'i
siri
Yq
,,,r. E,
*;
=_z;
H
'
I0-'
.d
s:
i:- o6 0 0
Et *?: *e
gs$a
$iE6
R
e
aa
F
i6
;43 F*.q{
..j biE!:E b
65eE5'.iEE
d
!r
g-BEEH
6
eP
EPegP 9q9
t56865
Fi
E
o).9
9L
o
2
-
I
q5
E
s
FR
gNEE
G
*;rH =9
TE8 fr3*5
S ASRR&
AR9F5 8E$A 5 5RfrRR
:
at:3
$5fl aa
9Y
tra5aa
;iq
ul
=6
38E68 ag+ aE 5&s819
o
2
3
o
z
I
.9
*eri
sFrHE
5
q:( o a o o{2
i x(5 ooaz<
9i=
H8f
c= Ei
,5;d "if;
9- .1.;+; ",
EgSHR
gF
a3s
$asae
RA=AE
F=
:>^ 6.:9
151"i€.9
'J9 6 ' ' 62
sts=E
qqq{E
Ee
o-
r,-9\=
P'n
-Eeeee
AEfr
s"'-
F{
q?$$F qEsqq
g_EEg.E
AEEEA
RSXAR
5
g,P
44333
2
f
9b
q5
I
5
sPrE as Ese
$FFHE
=]
ag8
t(f
8F&
cl
z
z
E
8
.=
dEit
E5g
EdgS
o
:
sirHi
!E
Eo 3:'
i
*E.'^e *
r-&€E
.:.o
$ Bd ca.fr*
,i'j;iE"_1E b
/F'BEE
5=8ef
6
=3F
(vos6@
zF
o.
8S ARN
9:9 -.,
i:,
a55sP
P
-or
39558
gln
5
.td
s-*"
F..o';
=
P9R
6545
Figure 5-29 (Sheet 6 of 8)
MAXIMUM RANGE CRUISE PERFORMANCE
(1600 RPI\O
Original
lssue
5-95
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
s
o
a
EA
$iE5
$
SAAF
$FEHE
EC}
>=
o.s,
o
z)
agsgb
s
R
gY
a
q:
$FEE
$FEHE
8863F gsgss
g$ 598
5BB
hqq
tlLi
rl
=c
z5
o
a
o
z)a
.9
F
sa s$a a$
3
5+935
$EFE
o
*irHa
F
6
9"
7
'
.bi
.a9
$be$8 gg 3s5 gR
FSRFF asRah
e+9as
SFF9'
ls
-*3
E
^g!-q
P=
6a ?c
-5=
=o
6
o
(!
aasR*
HEn
I
Ei
sEgEg gEE. .E. E6
ct.n
--E
6b
Fisure 5-2e ,"o."j gfi$L"MANCE
MAXTMUM Fo*?ft3fHf;r,
J-YO
Original lssue
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
t
z
o
$FEE
gFEH6
E <,!
a
F
Eg
d).9j
o
t
=
o
t
q5
$FIE 8tE5e
a
c!
$FFi 9=
5;
6^o
F
=(f
a
t
o
o
z
I
'd
HFF6
5
E
F
i*
HFM! B
eE
YX
iia .E;9
i-4r d;5 a
c;;?fEe
pe.Fe
E3o+---'
!3 g
'
(/)biF
c
Hr
lt
c.i
F
Lil
5
F
4.
o*E
E€-
6
F
g:F
eE:
:g
E=Eg;
=EE
5FE;f;S
f 1d.* npl
.r
4ts*rE
SEscF
H= d_J=i>
=d
l;o
-
*;+;o
Figure 5'35
LANDING FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED
Orioinal lssue
5-t03
sEcTroN
5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
Qqq
EpE
E
!
NSt
i!
!
rr
B';E ;E g
H +s E€5
. lE;
I iF;tii$
rEgEan
ggg
II A:BEEEE
HAE;::E
E; 8;
p*s
g
:;!
SEE
icrEERfr
c:E5::3
[;s€
pi
a:
rfgEae
PFE
g
=soPi;_gE
q"-€ EEEE s
:liEsHs:E
Fe
H;.i
z
6ifi
=Jh
EE*
lo
l^=
sEgEap
I E=
I tE
lou-
2..-
ssEEit
cdH
dj+d
I E!
lEx
l'-
l;3
sEsEau
I
EdH
q.
;
-
t,-Ri.o
l
t:=
i lPg
lE+
A qi9lP<
"qi
;
:{E:
l:;
. |; 69 I 19
gea , l E;
E
,i
FI
Pt
FieF | 5f
-! xx t-6
i1;il&a
,ic 59E I ee
3:"s qi | .i3
Figure 5-36 (Sheet 1 of 8)
LANDING DISTANCE
5-104
1 June 1987
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
9! E
9!P
o 6:
r
t
;TE
E:S
H
.e
EEE
:iX
E5E
EEE e9?
!6=FFFx
i
IEEE
s559 bEE
9*"9I s s 9
EE
ie'-3!F*
eIEi-*e-!<
i=
E: sl)
q=:FeE3
;EEEfE6
*I e c!€E
R;€Bg€c
!iiE3s;.=
Pgfie3frB
g: EcEEi
a;;6
-.i
o
z
P
ilili
rE:Ean
Z ,i-
ittii
I6ll
(5-
iiiri
sEgEa*
z,r
tiitl
epH
c'-
sEgsEe
gESbS
z,E
oFr!
(5-
rEgEan
z.*
Sil|r
PPH
(,i
Pd
a3a88 aaaaa
3 e;
3 6;
6E; ES
=:
'-I g:E= g
Er5
e
eH33
.d,* *p1
H'iE;9
cc
_=:E';
z4 +E Pg;
oo
i-5;_3j
o
o
1 June 1987
;iz
ER
Fieure 5-36 (Sheet 2 of 8)
LANDING DISTANCE
5-105
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
I o.9
8EE E
;*E :eE
H.8:
gE:
=
EEE
€€g
Yd 9!
! Fi;=e
3,:--&&E
E
o
E;sEan
2.,
(5*
E
i
5
s5r€!EE
E+PsEEg
9=q<3Oo
icxiF9*
s;E i;e€
P€ 5 T 3 o s
sEsEEn
z, .,
5E*
q3:EeE3
;9EijStsA
El6 E€Ex
r;sEEn
+3: ss€.E e o
!H339;EF
Hg$EgEgE
g
5; e€3€g
t! -i ^i
Z-.*
o-
o
z
sEisAn
cl -,E
2
OFul
E;E
ct-
a;
:.€
Y
,94
ri o
a!
6u Y c cc:
'=-9ol-.o:
69.P9 3 y
{;,q F -:E
6
=p
o
o
F;gEE
5-106
rrlFE
ir-'
e6??
HHE=
;ez,
ii
gF
Figure 5-36 (Sheet 3 of 8)
LANDING DISTANCE
1 June 1987
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
Eeg
4c:
o
5!
d+6
PERFORMANCE
E
e
E
sagsEn
iiiri
ittii
iiill
ltili
9 .;
APF ;E:;
E.8* E€E
E;:
**c
:9R isE
: A-.joo
zI-il! ,rOtur
EE*
6
E:; F::5
g:*[EBE
e5ssEEE
EEBEgHE
' E_:; aols
zf.iul.r-
.:-g;,9=.99
E^;::ox
gEgear
g:
E;:Ri
E=qtgsi
;EE E*E 6
E;€FgCg
EU!402:E
EgBcEFs
H! EgE!!
H;.i
o
itiii
6eiEEn
ti
o6!!
EFG
iii
(.'-
2, ,E
epH
ct-
z
EeiEan
EHFSH
z,
t-iul.E
BgH
II
9?9
,9::
:9*
q*^
Ba
EEFgH
I9
!,
9:
aaaSa
a<
E+
dH
a€:EEgE
iEE:id€
<-tiA *pl
cc E o'f i !
z= RE a9:
HH 8.5;-:=
..i.'i +;,.t
9t
o
sEE=
;q
G=
gF
"'f x"'f
1 J une 1987
""*3Sfsiii,8trt)
5-107
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORMANCE
doo
E!!
P
segEan
-:;
Cq!
seE
2.,
OFt!
(5-
EEE
I:Ei
€€;
I : Fbt::9
II e:*ates
sE:Ean
H?E:::E
P5#Es;
;9.=Fg*
e:EE;e€
Z,*
f_ir!
O^t!
o-
E= E; s.e.;
its b ts
o P€ 9R
:9:
E!
Bi€qgc;e
:3 Hii EeE E
ggEEiE
FE
o
sElstn
<-h
0d-n
6E-
2
sEgEan
3
9
q
EiE
EE*
a>
".?
I
ul._'.
odi
"ol,9
t
.FF; :g
Ed 9; dA
c?
-
o:
r::3EF;
=-9
Te::-r;"8
+T€,8 e:E
4r e o-*5
FEPg;
n_5=-9=
;d
==
6
zo
3ab9E
Aros()@
UJFI!
Erj
eFSE
HBiB-,o
62
gF
Figure 5-36 (Sheet 5 of 8)
LANDING DISTANCE
5-108
'I June 1987
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
FpE
!
B'RF ;E 5
3 A - E: F
FdE Pg6
'i 49
,^aa
€F; EE:
q
= =d
p
PERFORMANCE
o
*3$pEs
tr9pH3*
lttti
cr,
z. ,E
c'-
-i!
Fi;=e
g:-Bs5
F
E
5
g**BI aE
I
sasE6n
gr€Ve€9
ie.SEFP
cE E i:*n€
P: b:: ti 4 =
tiiii
c;e
63E69X9
lpcEEsH
E!iP€E:
rr:sse
a!€ F€Et s
E}8Eg;EF
2.ts
t.i|r1
PFH
ct-
Fc EEEg€E
o
z
o
Z.E
.ExE
ct-
c
HA12a-'6
ii2
!uo
Fieure 5-36 (Sheet 6 of 8)
i-ANDING DISTANCE
1 June 1987
5-109
SECTION 5
MODEL 406
PERFORNNANCE
gsP
:;E
iB
9I
g
rEsEee
EeE
EEE
9BF
3+h
o-
EqE
; PS E;-E.
: Fbz=e i
O-ul
3iHBFFE
s5E3 b"E E
E5F; E g;
;9d=0PX
rEgEsr
5 EE
3s:1
c;e
s:E E:n€
FE c e 3 fl q
ipc 3EE H
.E! E F€E*
e;€ lgEE e
:3dEi3osE
CH$HEfiqE
fiE egEeSE
o sHgsEn
gAPJS
e.96!+
6.E
P-.i
-
z
o
rEssAn
2..9
q
8EE
<99;
R,E E
5di
oF 5
i
:!e
1c
! 9q r
06
s*
3 o '.=9
69:9ePY
,9F 9: EEE
o?
i*o.9 *pY
b--Ef E
.;-=au--E
*Es9:
d- J;3;
EY
==
o
zF
o
ir5
-.6??
HHE=
+3
ii z,
g8
N(ri\t6@
Figure 5-36 (Sheet 7 of 8)
LANDING DISTANCE
5-1 10
1 June 1987
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
MODEL 406
E.9geE
€
q
eF* !:;
E
E5
z,r
'
illrr
-irJ
o=uJ
PtsE EEE
EE:
r
liiii
rEgEEn
E
rirll
ct-
€€Eb
d: !:Fr x
o d*-oo
^
E: BAEE
g5:c
E
o
6EE
rEgEar
a)
EEFEESi
2..-
PiE;:Ri
PEH
st;;
cii$HuHs
H: EEAES
cj+d
H -"i
o
z
ttill
o-
E=psgS;
,E* ggEg
a"-a iEEe
e FE
€333F
E
o
b
sE:Ean
2'.3.iul
e9H
(,-
sHtEsu
z.i
.^
I+
<;
saRaa
G;E
o-
P9
F€E
aBi
(, E
i
u* !,
Ro e;
gg
E:
d!
SiiAp
H9
o-:'X i6 ' w/q
,,"(rd:c
d d ogi:
Z= il=-35
+Es9;
HH
!o ^i.";+;.'
1 June 1987
IIJ
HEFFF
Ei
EEe*
HHE=
+8
az
gR
Fieure 5-36 (Sheet 8 of 8)
r;ANDING DISTANCE
5-1 11(5-112 blank)
SFAB 41
sEcTtoN 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TNTRODUCTION .....
AIRPLANE WEIGHING
Page
.........6-3
PROCEDURE
.....6-3
WEIGHTANDBALANCERECORD .......6-?
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION FOR FLIGHT . . 6-?
AIRPLANEWEIGHINGFORM.
.......,..6-9
WEIGHTANDMOMENTTABLE.
.......6-10
^IENTER-OF-GRAVITY LIMITS ENVELOPE GRAPH ...... 6-16
SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM . 6-1?
WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD
...,..6.18
EQUIPMENT LrST . .
. 6_19 (6_20 blank)
WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM 6-19 (6-20 blank)
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
6-1 (6-2 blank)
SFAR 4I
sEcroN 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
INTRODUCTION
Section 6 of this handbook provides procedures for establishing the
weight and moment and procedures for determinaimlane's basic emptv-balanie
for flieht. This section also describes all
ind the weieht anit
itelms on th; Weight and Balance Data sheet which was provided with
the aimlane (locatcd in the back of this handbook in a plastic envelope)
as delivered from Cessna Aircraft, Company.
NOIE
It is thz responsibility of the operator to erLsure
thAt thg airitnnp is lnadbd proierly.
^AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURE
To Establish Basic Empty Weight
The airplane nust be weighed in the following configuration
1. Wing flaps shall be fully retracted and all other control surfaces
shall be in neutral.
2. Service engine oil and landing gear hydraulic fluid reservoir as
required to obtain a normal fi.rll indication.
3. Check landing gear down and parking brake released.
4. R.ernove all equipnent
-tools, and items not to be included in basic, eqFty
cont€nts in cabinets and drawers and flobrweight such ig
mats.
5. All equiprnent and furnishings must be in their standard location to
facilitati corrections to "Airplane Standard Empty Weight" and
"Center-of-Gravity'' location.
6. All seats shall be properly installed on tracks and placed in the
most forward positibn against the seat stop. All seat backs shall be
in the vertical-position a;d seat belts crossed on the seat cushion.
?. Close all bagg.age. doors, tailcone access door, main cabin door and
emergency exrl wrndows.
8. Clean the aimlane inside and out.
9. Remove all snow, ice or water which nay tre on the airplane.
10. Weigh the airplane in a closed hangar to avoid errors caused by air
'
currents.
11. Defuel the airplane in accordance with the following steps.
Original lssue
6-3
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
CONDUCT ALL DEFUELING OPERAflOlvS AT A SATE DISTANCE FROM
OTHEE AIRPLANES AND BUILDINGS,
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT MUST
BE READILY AVAILABLE. ATTACH
TWO GROUND WIRES FROM DIFFENENT POINTS ON THE AIRPLANE TO
SEPARATE APPROVED GBOUNDING
STAKES. THE USE OF TWO GBOUND
WIRES WILL PEEVENT UNGROUND.
ING OF THE AIRPLANE DUE TO AC.
CIDENTAL DISCONNECTING OF EITHEN WIRE,
a. T\rrn off all electrical power.
b. Tum crossfeed selector OFF.
c. Remove engine cowl.
d. Disconnect the engine fuel supply line on each engine
and
insert these lines into suitable fuel containers.
e. Apply external power to the airplane.
f. Energize the fuel boost punps until fuel flow is terminated'
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE FUEL
BOOST PUMPS, SHUT OFF THE PUMPS
AS SOON AS FUEL FLOW B TERMINAI|ED.
Drain the remaining fuel through the fuel lrain and - crossfeed
valves into an apprdpriate container. Each drain should remain
open until the deiireling rate slows to approximately I drop per
second.
h. The fuel remaining on-board after defueling is residual fuel and
is included in the basic empty weight.
i. Drainable unusable fuel must be added aft.er the weighing to
obtain basic empty weight. Figure 6-1 includes the weight and
arms necessary to add the drainable unusable fuel.
o-+
Original lssue
sEcTloN 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
12. Leveling
}IOTE
The airplane mrnt be leuel during weighing to
d.eterrnine the Center-of-Grauity. Always Leuel
laterally before leueling longitudinnlly.
a. On landing Gear
(1) Inflate the main gear struts to maximum extension and the
nose gear strut to ninimum extension.
(2) Place scales under nose wheel and each main wheel.
(3) To level laterallv.
place a spirit level directly on the seat
-fi.rselage
' tracks over the -mii:r
station 1??.45. Adjust
spar
the main gear tire or strut pressurC to center the bubble.
(4)
level loneitudinallv, unscrew the two screws approxi' ' To
matelv 0.25 inch at "iivel Point" on the right side of the
fuselase at Stations 248.25 and 272.65. Place the level on
these icrews and level longitudinally by adjusting the nose
wheel tire or strut pressure to center the bubble.
b.
On Jack Points
KEEP THE AIRPLANE LEVEL WHILE JACKING TO PREVENT SLIPPING OFF JACK
POINT AND DAMAGING THE AIRPLANE,
ltotE
strut to preuent
allow minimum' Lota| jac-
When possibl,e, secure nose gear
extension. Thi,s
hing heieht.
uill
(1) Raise the airplane with the hoisting jacks until all
wheels
are clear of the floor.
(2) To level laterallv, place a level directly on the seat tracks
over the main spai nnelage station 177.45. Raise or l')wer
the jacks under ihe wing iack poinLs until the level bubble
centers.
(3) To level longitudinally, unscrew the two "Level Point"
screws approiimately 0.25 inch on the right side of. the
fuselase ai StationB- 248.25 and' 272.65. Place a level on
these icrews and raise or lower the nose jack until the level
bubble certers.
Original lssue
6-5
sEcTtoN 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
When weighing on the wheels or jack points with mechanical
scales, ensure the scales are in calibration within the last 6 months
and used per the manufacturer's recommendations. When weighing
on the wheels, deflate or inllate the gear struts and/or tires until
the airplane is level. Gear struts and/or tires must be serviced per
maintenance manual before airplane is put back into service.
14. When weighing on the jack points with electronic weighing sca.les,
attach the electronic weighing cells to the proper mounting adapters to prevent slipping.
a. Prepare the electronic weighing kit, which has been calibra+*d
or certified correct in the last t2 months, for use by following
the manufacturer's instructions provided with the weighing kit.
Adjust all jacks simultaneously until the cells are in contact
wiih the jick poinLs. Contimie jacking, keeping the airplane
level, until the airplane is supported at the jack points only.
15. Determine scale reading, ecale drift and tare from all three scales.
lo, Lower the airplane and clear the weighing cells as soon as the
1Q
readings are obtained.
77. Computations (refer to Figure 6-1).
a. Enter the scale reading, scale drift and tare from ell three scales
in the columns in the Aiplane As Weighed Table. Compute
and enter values for the Net Weight and Airplane Total As
Weighed columns.
b.
Determine the Center-of-Gravity arm of the airplale using the
formula presented in Figure 6-1.
c. Enter the total Net Weight and Center-of-Gravity Arm in the
a;d Center-of-Gravity Tible columns.
Multiply the Weight (Pounds) entry times the Centerof-Gravity Arm (Inches) entry to determine Moment
Basic Empty Weight
(Inches-Pounds/100) entry. Total each of the thre€ columns to
determine basic empty weight, Center-of-Gravity arm and moment,
TOIE
An attempt should be made to uerifit the results
of each weighing, uhcn data for comparison is
auailable.
Center-of-Gravity arn and moment
in the Weight and Balance Computation Form, refer to 6-4 and
the Weight and Balance Record, refer to Figure 6-5.
d. Enter Basic Empty Weight,
6-6
Original lssue
z\
sEcTloN 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD
The Weight and Balance Record, refer to Figure 6-5, provides a record
to reflect the continuous history of changes in airplane structure and/or
equipment which affects the weight and balance of the airplane.
The Basic Empty Weight of your airplare is entered at the appropriate location on the Weight and Balance Data sheet as delivered
from the factory. Changes to the structure or equipment should be
entered on the Weight and Balance Record when any modifications are
made to the airplane. It is the responsibility of the airplane owner to
assure this record is up to date, as all loadings will be based on the latest
entry.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION FOR
FLIGHT
The following is a sample weight and balance determination. For an
actual determinition for vour airblane. refer to the equivalent illustrations on the Weight and Iialance Data sheet provided in your airplane.
To compute the weight and balance for your airplane, use Figures 6-2
throueh 6--5 as follows: -
fut th" Basic Ernpty Weight and Moment/lO0 from the latest entry
shown "on the Weight and Balance Data sheet or Weight and Balance
Record and enter them in it€m 1 (Basic Empty Weigh-t) of Figure 6-4._
For this sample, assume a weight bf 5190 pbui:ds aid
--- ofl
-.-- mornerit/rOo
---*--
8884.5e.
-'l
NOTE
A blank Weight and .Bqlance Form
for
th,e operator's conuenience,
is prouided.,
at thc end of this
sectlon.
Deterrnine arm, weight and moment/l00 of the crew, passengerc,
from Figures 6-2 and 6-3 and 6nter t-hem
unilir- Payload Computations in Figrire 6-4. The crew and passenger
loading table is applicable only when the Center-of-Gravity of the occupant is at the location specified.
baggage and cabinet contents
If the seats are in any other position than stated in Figure 6-2, the
moment must be computed by multiplying occupant weight times the
arm in inches. A point 9 inches forward of the intersection of the seat
bottom and seat back with seat cushions compressed can be assumed to
be the occupant Center-of-Gravity. For a refirence in determining the
arm, the aft end of the cabin seat tracks is fuselage station 289.08.
Refer to Figure 6-4. Total the Payload Computations items and enter
the resulting Weight and Moment/100 in item 2.
1 June 1988
o-/
sEcloN
6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
Refer to Figure 6-4. Total items 1 (Basic Empty Weight) and 2
-l(Fuselage
Payl6ad) to determine appropriate entries'for item 3 (Zero
lFuel Weight with Zero Wing Locker Payload).
I
I R"f"r to Figure 6-4. Item 4 (Wing Locker Payload) is determined from
Table of Fizure 6-2.
Ithe anplicable
--
I
I R"t", Lo Figure 6-4. Item 5 (Fuel Loading)
is determined from the
applicable Table of Figure 6-2.
Total items 3,4 and 5 to deterrnine 6 (Ramp Weight). Enter item 6
I-totals
in Fizure 6-3 to determine if the loading is within allowable linits.
If the poini falls within the envelope, the lbading is approved. If the
point f; s outside the envelope, it \i,ili be necessary to redistribute the
load.
(Less \el- Fo1- Taxiing) from
I Refer to Figure 6-4. Subtract item 7itim
8 (Takeoff Weight). The
to
delermine
lit --b fn"-o" Weisht)
-t*iins
'frol-"nt'oi-thi tu"i -r;;d i;.
is determi"ed by the difierence in
moments
-t"t"ls of the fuel loaded and the fuel remaining after taxi. Enter item
in Fizure 6-3 to determine if the loading is within allowable
ttakeoff'weisht must never exceed 9360 pounds). If the point falls
outside of the envelope, it will be necessary to redistribute the load.
la
-limits
Refer to Section 5 for estimated fuel used during the flight. Determine
of the fuel to be used. The moment h determined
thJ esiimatcd weight
"in momenl,s
of the fuel remaining after taxi and the
br. th" diff"t"tt""
reaching
the
destination. Obtain Momen'r,/lO0 from
after
fiiel remainine
6-2. Eiter the total of these weights and Moment/100 in item 9
lFisure
-(kss Fuel To Destination).
Item 9 (Landins Weishi) is delermined by subtracting item 9 from
it€m 8. Enter itern- t 0 to-tals in Fizure 6-3 to determine if the loading is
within allowable limits. If the point falls within the envelope, the loading
is appr.oved. If the point falls outside the envelope, it will be necessary to
red!'ctnbute lne toao.
o-t
1 June 1988
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
NOTE
IT tS TttE SESmNSIBlUry
fHE
rHAf
rm
r5o
am
TEE AIRPIANE IS LOADED
250 300 350 &O
.USELAGE STATION (FS)
_
OF
OPERAMR TO ENSURE
.r50
INCHES
LOCAIING CC WITII AIRPLAI{E OiI LANOINC GEAA
L€GEND
Dim6Nion
l - fldizdral dlri.n4 lrm
oimeion a -
afior altpld. k l.v€l m
Ho.t2@rrr di3t @ r.m
c.nlo. ot netn bndtng g4r axt€ lo c.nr$ ot noe ta.di.g gss arr6 (d6tehin€d by no$u.€m€n,
@los).
.€lor*a
datuF lo
dtd
ot mah taiding g.$ dto obrain l}ls dBi.m by n€asunng hm
and 3lb3rsctinq rhi3 var6 tr@ dtMsad A ;nd a.tding to FS 99'\@
54.
)*rr potrI FS 09 5r b @w ot tw bndi.g gs.. .ie
{Mu3l b. m6&r.d aft6r atlPl.G is r.vor 6 s€t6.)
FOBMUT lorLonoitudinarco
(om.Nis
CG
^-
ot
.,o,*.-
e,
Cd.,
_
N€r
a) x tN@ r6.di^q
w€€rnX
N6. .nd Main
wo,oht
I
Llrd,no G.at
rolabd{
_
LEVELTNG PnOVtSlOftS
LOCATING CO WITH AIRPLANE OII JACK PAOS
T-."-"*-";-*'"*;;-l
I
FORMULA tor Longinxrn.r CC
cG
^h
aa'lM
104.51
o'
2o.r
os
x iNo.6 J.ck po^l
---...'.i9:$|+{@ ./'d wns rdcr
w€lghr
Poinr
Tor.r€dl
,
)
FUSELAGE
-,
I
L TER^L
I
ArFS243,2s AND FS 272.65
ON SE^r rR^Ct(S OVEA
-
M
rrsp^R
rd P.rhr
_
_.
-
MAC
An
------_naE(cG
ol Ar@€ftr
160 04
DFAINASLE IINIISABLE FUEL AT 670 POUNOS PEF GAfLON
Figure 6-l
AIRPLANE WEIGHING FORM
Original lssue
I
I
)
LOCANNG PERCENT MAC
FOAMUL
|
o-v
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
FUEL LOADING
2025.72
2062.19
2098.65
37.4E
74.92
112.32
149.68
187.00
2?4.24
261.53
298.75
335.93
373.07
410.19
2135.11
484.33
521.35
55E.37
595.3,1
4089.70
4125.08
2351_O2
4269.61
4413.71
4449.E6
743.00
779.89
816.77
853.62
890.46
927.27
964.07
2718.1-l
2154.52
2790.44
2427.15
2863.45
2899.73
2936.00
1000.85
2972_17
3008_34
1074.36
1t 11.09
1147.80
1184.50
1221.14
3044.50
3n80.65
3116.79
3152.92
1237 _45
3225.16
3261.27
3297.38
3333.47
3369.55
3405.63
3441.70
3r89.05
1294.51
1331.15
1307.78
1404.40
r
'1.41.00
14f7.60
1514.21
1550.82
1567.41
1623.99
r733.66
'1770.20
1806.73
1643.25
1879.76
1916.26
1952.75
r 949 24
4522.13
{558.24
4594.34
4630.43
4066.52
4702.59
4738_66
4810.76
4846 80
48E2.43
4918.85
4954.86
4990.86
5026.84
5062.82
5098.80
5134.59
5170.39
5206.19
5242.00
u77.77
3513.83
5421.14
3585.92
3621.96
3658.00
3693.98
3729.95
3765.93
1697.11
4486.0r
s2f7 _42
5313.04
5349.46
5385.30
35{9 88
1660.56
€05.60
4341.60
4377.60
26E1_42
i037.61
4197.64
4233.€3
2499_U
2536.26
2609.07
2645.45
70f.12
4t61.66
2403.41
2572.6f
632.29
669.22
4017.75
4053.72
2171.55
2208.00
2244.52
2241.03
2317.53
2390.50
2426.96
447.28
3945.80
3981.77
5457.00
5492.86
5524.72
5564.60
s600.48
5636.38
5
2.24
3801.91
5708.r9
3837.88
3073.85
3909.83
5780.05
5785.58
574412
I()TE
OFuel weight based on 6.70 pounds/gallon.
OFor additional fueL informatinn refer to Section 8.
Figure 6-2 (Sheet 1 of 6)
WEIGHT AND MOMENT TABLE
6-10
Original lssue
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
CREW. PASSENGERS AND CARGO COMPARTMENTS
CREW
AIO PAS3EMIERS
CAROO OO||PARTTIIfT3 @i{TENT3
CNEW. PASSETOEBA A O
CAROO COI|PARIXEIfTS XO*,IT Ant'|S
Gtr|
ww
Tit m
ww
nTn
w
rTl
w
w
w
Figure 6-2 (Sheet 2 of 6)
WEIGET AND MOMENT TABLE
Original lssue
6-11
sEcTtoN 6
MODEL 406
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
CREW, PASSENGERS, CABINET AND CARGO
COMPARTMENTS
IND
TOflE TARMS
CREW' PASSEIICEnS
CAN@
CREW A}ID PAAS€MiEBS
caBrt{Et arD canoo
colrP^nl*$rTs
@
"AFTIIEXTS
COi{TEXTA
Fisure 6-2 (Sheet 3 of 6)
WEIGtrT AND MOMENT TABLE
6-12
Original lssue
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
CREW, PASSENGERS, CABINET AND CARGO
COMPARTMENTS
CREW At{O PASSETIOERS
CARGO COMPAATMENTS COXTENIS
CREW, PASSENGEA At{O
CAROO CO'iIPARTMEXTS MO EMTARHS
mm
tf !f
i;t a;t
tv !7
Figure 6-2 (Sheet 4 of 6)
WEIGHT AND MOMENT TABLE
Original lssue
6-13
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
CREW, PASSENGERS, CABINET AND CARGO
COMPARTMENTS
CREW AXD PASSENOENS
CAR(IO COIPAETMENTS CO}IIEI{TS
CREW, PASSE]{GER AT{D
CARGO COUPARTTi,IEi{TS liloilEl{T ARli'lS
Ficure 6-2 (Sheet 5 of 6)
WEIGIIT AND MOMENT TABLE
6-14
Original lssue
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
CREW AND CARGO COMPARTMENTS
CARGO COMPART EiITS CONTE}ITS
can@ colrP^RruE
Ts
@ rExrs
CREW AXD CABOO
cofiP^a Exrs ottErr airrs
Figure 6-2 (Sheet 6 of 6)
WEIGHT AND MOMENI' TABLE
Original lssue
6-15
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
164 166 r6a 170 1t2 \71 176 173 rao 132 184
MODEL 406
136
810 12 14 16 1A 20 22 21 262A30 323-{ 36 3340
CENTER OF.GRAVITY
- P€RCENT ]VAC
1672-2
Figure 6-3
CENTER-OF-GRAVITY_LIMITS ENVELOPE GRAPH
6-16
1 June 1988
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
WEIGHT MOMENT/
ITEM
FUSELAGE PAYLOAD
100
CO[IPUTATIONS
IVOMENT/
ITEM
r00
OCCUPANTS
1
137.00
170
232.90
SEAT 2
137.00
170
232.90
SEAT 3
178.00
170
302.60
SEAT 4
178.00
170
302.60
SEAT 5
218.00
170
370.60
SEAT 6
218.00
170
370.60
SEAT 7
249.00
170
423.30
SEAT 8
249.00
150
373.50
SEAT
SEAT 9
SEAT
1O
SEAT
11
1.
BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT
171.19
5190
8884.59
FUSELAGE PAYLOAD
1600
2793.60
ZERO FUEL WEIGHT
WITH ZERO WING
LOCKER PAYLOAD
(sub-tolal) (Do not exceed
weighr limil ot 8500 pounds)
6790
11,678.19
'Akplane CG
2,
3.
45.
6,
:
200
422.00
1240
2241.03
8230
14,381.22
-60
-109.48
8170
14,271.74
-800
-1465.43
7370
12,806.31
WING LOCKER PAYLOAO
FUEL LOADING
RAMP WEIGHT
(sub'tolal) (Do nol exce€d
maximum ramp weight
of 9435 pounds)
7,
LESS FUEL FOR TAXIING
8.'.TAKEoFF WEIGHT
(0o not exceed maximum
tak€off weight ot 9360
SEAT 12
SEAT 13
'Airplan€ CG
SEAT 14
:
173.77
9.
CARGO
O.
AVTONICS
32.00
NOSE
71.00
CARGO A
170.00
CARGO B
197.00
CARGO C
224.O0
CARGO D
251.00
CABGO E
278.00
AFT CABIN
FLOOR
281.00
260
184.60
LESS FUEL TO DESTINATION
--LANDING WEIGHT
(Oo not exceed maximum
landing weight of 9360
"Airplane cG
*Ai,pranecG
:
:
172.72
"SE58If*
*
too
--Totals must be within approved weighi and cent€r_ofqravity limils. It rs the rosponsrbrlity of ths operator lo
;nsurb tnat tne a'rplane ia loaded properly. ih€ Basic
Empty weight CG is nor€d on the Airplane weEhrng
Form ll lh€ airplsn€ has been alt6rod, relerto theweEhl
and Balanc€ Record for information.
301.00
BAY B
Enler on lhe CenteFof-Gravity Limits Env€lope Graph to
chock if within approved limils (shaded area).
317.00
CAAINET
CONTENTS
FUSELAGE
1600
2793.60
1672-A
Figure 6-4
SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM
1 June 1988
6-17
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
(CoNTINUOUS fTSTOBY OF CHANGES tN STFUCTUnE MODTFTCATTON
OFI EOUIPMENT AFFECTINE WEIOHT ANO BALANCE)
Figure 6-6
WEIGIIT AND BALANCE RECORD
6-18
Original lssue
sEcTroN 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
MODEL 406
EQUIPMENT LIST
For a complete list of the required and optional equipment installed in
the airplane as delivered from the manufaiturer, refer-to the equipment
list furnished with the aimlane.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
COMPUTATION FORM
FUSELAGE PAYLOAD
COMPUTATIONS
,I,
BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT
*Airplane
SEAT
1
137.00
SEAT 2
137.00
cG
:
ZERO FUEL WEIGHT
WITH ZERO WING
LOCKER PAYLOAD
(sub-total) (Do not exceed
w€ight llmil ot 8500 pounds)
SEAT 3
SEAT 4
WING LOCKER PAYLOAD
SEAT 5
SEAT 6
SEAT 7
SEAI
6.
RAMP WEIGHT
(sub-total) {Do not 6xc€ed
maximlm ramp weighl
ol 9435 pounds)
7.
LESS FUEL FOR TAXiING
8
SEAT 9
SEAT 1O
8. "TAKEoFF wEtcHr
(Do nol exceed maximum
takeoit weight ol 9360
SEAT 11
SEAT 12
*Airptane
SEAT 13
SEAT 14
9.
CARGO
O.
AVTONICS
32.O0
NOSE
CG
..LANDING
WEIGHT
(Do not exceed maximum
landing wsight oJ 9360
pounos)
cc
CARGO A
'Airptans
CARGO B
"Airprane cG :
CARGO C
CAAGO
D
CARGO E
278.00
AFT CABIN
FLOOR
281.00
:
LESS FUEL TO DESTINAIION
to#58#oo
"
too
ttToials must
be wilhin approvod weight and center"o!
gravity limits. ll
lhe .espons,bility 01 lhe operator lo
's
rs loaded properly. The Basc
sflsure lhat ths airplane
Emotv weioht CG rs noted on the ArrDlane weiohino
Form. ll th€:irplane has been altered, reterto th€ W'erqhi
and Balance Record for inlormation.
301.00
BAY B
317.00
1 June 1988
Enter on lhe Csnter-ol-Gravity Limiis Envelope Graph to
check if within approved limils (shaded ar6a).
6-19 (6-20 blank)
SFAR 41
MODEL 406
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEi'S
sEcIoN
7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
AIRFRAME
FLIGHT CONTROLS
Aileron System
Aileron Trim System .
Elevator Syst€m
Elevator Trim System .
Rudder System
Rudder Trim System .
INSTRUME}.IT PANEL .
Overhead Console .
Annunciator Panel ..
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GROUND CONTROL
Nosewheel Steering System
Minirnum T\rrning Distance
WINGFLAPS SYSTEM
LANDINGGEAR..
Landing Gear Safety Switches
Landing Gear Position Lights
Landing Gear Warning Hom ..
Page
....,..7-5.
.....7-5
...,,7-5
...,.,..7-G
......,...7-7
........7-8
.........7-9
.......7-10
......,..7-11
........7-74
....7-14
...7-15
.......7.T9
.... 7.20
.....'l-20
.....7-21
.......,,7.2I
.....7-23
. . . 7-23
....7-25
.....,,,.7-25
...... 7 -26
Landing Gear Emergency Extension System .
.....7-26
Landing Gear Shock Struts
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS ....
.,,.., 7-28
........7-29
Cargo Loading
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESSES . . . . . 7.30
......7-30
Pilot and Copilot Provisions . . . . . .
Passenger Provisions
..........7-30
........7.31
DOORS,WINDOWSANDEXITS
...7-31
Cabin Door
....7-32
Crew Door
.......... ?-33
Cargo Door
.....7-33
Windows
..... 7-33
EmergencyExit/VentilationWindows
.....7-34
CONTROLLOCK..
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
7-1
SECTION 7
MODEL 406
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
ENGINE
Engine Controls
Engine Instrumentation ..
Engine Break-In Procedure
Engine Oil System .
Ignition System
Air Induction System .
Inertial Separator System
Exhaust Systen
Cowl Flaps
Starting
.
Syst€m
Engine Accessories . . . . .
Engine Shock Mounts .
Fire Detection and Extinguishing
PROPELLER
Overspeed Governor Test
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tanks
Drain Valves
Fuel Indicating Systern
Fuel Pumps
Vent
System
System
Switch
.
.
FirewallShutoffValveSwitches
Fuel Flow Gages .
Fuel Quantity Gage ..
Fuel L,evel Low Warning Lights .
Engine Fuel Systenr .
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM
ELECTRICALSYSTEM
Battery .
Battery and Generator Switches
Generator Control Units
Voltmeter and Ammeters
Circuit Breakers, Switch Breakers and Fuses
Spare Fuses
AC Power
Extemal Power Receptacle
Crossfeed System
.......7-34
.......7-35
...'..7-38
......7-39
"..7-39
....'..7-39
...'...'.7-40
'.,,..1-40
..,....7-40
"",,'..7-42
.,.....7-42
'.,....7-42
...,....7-46
.. '..,,.. 7-46
... 7-46
........7-48
........ 7-48
... 7-48
.........7-49
'.,".'.7-49
...7-49
."......7-53
'.... 7-53
......... 7-54
".'.7-54
.........7-54
........7-54
...7-54
.,....,.. 7-55
-57
.,.....
.....,...7-57
.'.'. ?-58
7-58
'."....'
........7-59
.'.'... ?-59
....... 7-59
7
...7-59
''" -62
......7-62
7
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
SECTION 7
MODEL 406
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
7
-62
External Lighting
Internal Lighting
BLEED AIR SYSTEM
HEATING, VENTILATING AND DEFROSTING
'7
-62
SYSTEMS
Cabin Air System .
Heating and Defrosting
Cabin Heat Controls .
Cabin Air Controls .
Air Duct Overheat Switch
.
TCTNGEQUIPMENT..
Propeller Deice System
AVTONICS
Avionics Interference
Avionics Master Switches
1000 Audio Control Panel
Locator Beacon
400 Marker Beacon .
400 Glideslope
Nav/Com
.
Finder
.
ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR TRIM
CABIN FEATURES ....
Cabin Fire Extinzuisher
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
7-66
...7-68
...'
Ventilating System. .
OXYGEN SYSTEM
PITOT/STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEM
Pilot's System
Copilot's System .
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
STALL WARNING SYSTEM
400 Automatic Direction
400
800 Yaw Damper
7-64
1......
.
7-68
7-68
.."""
'.".....7-68
.'.7-69
."'.7-69
...7-69
..... 7.71
.... 7.73
..'.....7-'13
.'...7-73
......... ?-73
.....7-'15
.........'t-79
'.......- 7-79
.....7_75
..' 7-80
...'... ?-80
..'...' 7-80
....... ?-85
'..7-85
.'.....' 7-88
..'..... ?-90
........7-92
'..' 7-98
'...7-99 (7-100 blank)
..... 7-99 (7-100 blank)
.....7-99 (7-100 blank)
7-3
sEcloN
7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIBPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
MODEL 406
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Page
7-1 Aileron System
7-2 Aileron Trim System
7-3 Elevator System
7-4 Elevator Trim System
7-5 Rudder System .
7-6 Rudder Trim System
?-7 Instrument Panel .
7-8 Overhead Console
7-9 Annunciator Panel and Warning Lights . .
.
7-6
.
7-7
7-8
7-9
.
.
7-10 Nosewheel Steering System
7-11 Minimum Turning Distance
7-12 Wing Flaps System
?-13 Landing Gear SYstem
?-14 Emergency Blow Down Bottle Pressure Gage . . '
?-15 Landing Gear Emergency Extension System .
7-16 Powerplant System .
7-1? Engine Air Flow
7-18 Propeller SynchroPhaser
7-19 Fuel System Schematic . .
7-20 Wing Fuel Hopper Tank Schematic
?-21 Hydraulic System Schematic
7-22 Hydraulic Reservoir Sight Gage
?-23 Electrical System Schematic ......
7-24 l-ntt and Right Side Consoles
7-25 Cockpit Lighting and Controls .
7-26 Cabin Lighting and Controls .
?-2? Bleed Air Shutoff Valve
7-28 Bleed Air System Schematic
?-29 Cabin Air System Schematic
?-30 Cockpit Oxygen Outlets
7-31 Oxygen Duration Chart . .
7-32 Pitot/Static Pressure System
?-33 Instrument Air System Schematic
?-34 1000 Audio Control Panel . . .
7-35 Marker Facilities
?-36 400 Marker Beacon Indicator Lights . .
7-37 Glideslope Indicator
?-38 400 ADF Controls and Indicators
7-39 400 NAV/COM Controls Panel and Indicators
7-40 Yaw Damper .
7- 10
7- 11
7
-t2
7
-74
7
-20
7
-27
7 -2',1
7-36
7
7
7
-4r
-45
-50
. . ' ' 7-57
?-56
....'.."
.'..."7-57
. '.. ?-60
'........ 7-61
...,..- -65
..... ' '.. 7-65
....'.'l-67
7
7
-67
7-70
7-7|
7-74
7 -76
7
-8r
7-86
7
-87
7-89
?-91
7
-94
7-98
Original lssue - 1 July 1986
MODEL 406
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
INTRODUCTION
its
Section ? provides a description and operation of the airplane and
s'stems'
orE
Operational procedures for optional systems and'
equipment are presenled Ln sectton v
AIRFRAME
The Model 406 is an all-metal, Iow-wing airplane .The fuselage and
empennaqe are of semimonocoque construction' Ihe wlng and nonzonurr
of conventional aluminum construction' The
^^ .i'J ti?"ltiu-*.f""".
-G;-I
"."
""i
which attach to tuqefa.ge at bulkhead
spars
;ffi;t*;;; -fit"-""t"r -"i"
panel iing has 2 main s.pars. which attach to the
iJ"'":ii""i.
sparc. rE" retractable hnding gear is a tricvcle
;;;;;;i";;";;bty
design using oil-over-air gear shock struts.
FLIGHT CONTROLS
flisht controls consist of the ailerons, elevaton and rudder and
The
''t".p?"ii*
i.i- .vtt"-". All of these surfaces are constructed of
ttt"i.
aluminum and are statiaally mass balanced.
Original lssue
7-5
sEcTtoN 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEIVIS
MODEL 406
AILERON SYSTEM
Each aileron, refer to Figure 7-1, is attached to the rear main wing
spar at two points. The aileron is actuated by a bellcrank which is
attached to a wheel in the wins. The wheel is actuated bv cables
attached to lhe pilot's control w'heel. An aileron-rudder inteiconnect
spring is incorporated to improve lateral stability.
,*-S
A
DETAIL
DETAIL \-
A
57603012P
Figure 7-1
AILERON SYSTEM
7-6
A58611022
857611018
c51612017
Original lssue
MODEL 406
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
AILERON TRIM SYSTEM
to
Aileron trim, refer to Figure 7-2, is achieved by-a trim-tab attached
tab
is
trim
The
hinge
piano-tvpe
iengtfi
d'ii
*,J'il"n-iii"i6ii';i;i'-;
jack
tlpe
screw
tq
is
attached
push-pull
which
rod
."i"ul"a tv a
.a
fitJ actuato. is driven bv cables attached to the
liiiiiii ii' t["'*i"-elthe
i;- "onttol knob oi cockpit control pedestal.
DETAIL A
DETAIL
B
57603010P
4516r r043
8576110r9
or"r*oRtii#-',.".trt
Original lssue
7-7
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
MODEL 406
ELEVATOR SYSTEM
The two elevator control surfaces, refer to Figure 7-3, are connected
by torque tubes. Each elevator assembly is attached to the rear spar of
the horizontal stsbilizer at three points. The elevator assemblv is actuated by push-pull rods which ire attached to a bellcrank- in the
empennage. The bellcrank is actuated by cables attached to the pilot's
control wheel.
DETAIL
B
606330O2
A60631003
DETAIL
860621002
Figure 7-3
ELEVATOR SYSTEM
7-8
Original lssue
MODEL 406
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEiiIS
ELEVATOR TRIM SYSTEM
Elevator trim, refer to Figure 7-4, is achieved by elevator trim tabs
attached to the right and left elevators wilh q ful-l length piano-t1pe
hinee. The trim ta6s are actuated by pushpull rods which are attached to
dual iack screw t!'pe actuators in the horizontal stabilizer' The actuators
ar,e d.iuen bv cabies attached to the trim control wheel on the cockpit
control pedeital.
DETAIL
DETAIL
C
60633001
454611016
B60e3r 0()1
I
c57613041
nrrvnt6'ffdftiol""rtrt
Original lssue
7-9
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
MODEL 406
RUDDER SYSTEM
The rudder, refer to Figure 7-5, is attached to the vertical stabilizer
rear rnain spar at three points. The rudder is actuated by a bellcrank
attached to the bottom of the rudder. The bellcrank is actuated by cables
attached to the cockpit
-to rudder pedals. A rudder-aileron interconnect
improve fateral stability.
spring is incorporated
DETAIL
A
60623@2
A54611010
860621tlo2
Figure 7-5
RUDDER SYSTEM
7-10
Original lssue
SECTION 7
SYSTEI/|S
ITS
AND
AIRPLANE
THE
OF
DESCRIPTION
MODEL 406
RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM
tab attached to
Rudder lrim, refer to Figure ?-6, is achieved pv a trim
hinge' rhe
piano-tvpe
il;ff';i',h";dE*.-*i*''th,j"il;;;
-n.,{ .1".'*t'aitached to.a-jack screw
*hi"h-it
push-pyii.md
bv a
i.li"'i"u l.
i
".t"ut"d j*n'-inl*;l;Jl;rff
::t,':,f"'H:',jl*o*'
:ffi f, :l'#i:;; jH"
DETAIL
A
oeratl B
60623m1
A60621001
854611012
*,r""rtttiitfr-3trtr*
Original lssue
7
-11
SFCTION 7
DESCBIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
MODEL 406
Figure 7-7 (Sheet 1 of 2)
INSTRUMENT PANEL (TYPICAL)
7-12
Original lssue
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
MODEL 406
trrerT
Edd
r--{
c,
I J'a-,
'1
3
^
5;H= 33LE!=
- Hffi
e
r:d{
a .EatiE
=
-
-::
E?
- Ht x
s EEce*ij EiiE.E=E€e siF#!
Es;EriE;+s=;5€i{H{iiE €li:g:E$
H
E
i
c.i ca
E33
{
$3f 3 E3i 33s 33 E 3i
.O (l) c- @ o) O
cD co cc .+
.rj cn ca c6 c.t
3 $E
93fr 33
i
(O c- @ o)
i c\ ca < r.J
d N c. ! {J (o \ cO q) Q 4
L? ro ro ro ui rn La l.) ro ro (0 <) 'Indicates which wavpoint data (FRQ, RAD or DST) the
inqement/decrement rotary switch will change
FREQUENCY DISPLAY (FRQ)
incremenls of .05 MHz.
'
Displavs frequencv from 10800
to 11795 MHz
in
RADIAL DISPLAY (RAD) Displays ground station radial on which walpoint is located
from 0.0 to 359.9 degtees.
DISTANCE DISPLAY (DST) - Displays the offset disbnce of the wavpoint ftom the
ground station over a range of 0.0 to 199.0 NM.
RMI DISPLAY (Optional) (Not Shown) ' Displavs tbe besring to the walpoint/station'
Consult the RMI Supplement 33 in S€ction 9 of this handbooL for additional informa7.
WAYPOINT/MODE (WPT/MODE) CONTROL dual concentric knobs
a.
Th€ outer knob selects the MODE of unit operation. Turning the knob clockwise
causes the mode to sequence thru VOR, VOR PAR, RNV, RNV APR and then back
center knob selects the WPT to be disptaved Tuming the knob causes the
displayed wawoint to incrcment by on€ thru th€ walpoint sequence of 1,2" 9'0,1'
b. The
Momentary pushbutton which' when pressed, causes the active
watpoint to take on the same value as the displayed wawoint
L USE BUTTON -
Mornentary pushbutton which, when press€d, cauees the
active wa,?oint to rcturn to the display
L RETURN BUTTON (RTN) -
RADIAL BUrION (RAD) Push on, push off button which, when pushed on,
causes
the remote DME to display the radial from ststion in VOR mode, or radial from
wawoint in RNAV mode inslead of KTS, ald "F" (FROM) appeam inst€ad of MIN'
CHECK BUTTON (CHK) - Moment€rv pushbutton which, when pressed, causes the
mw radio data ftom the NAV Receiver and DME lo be displaved The radial from the
VOn eround station will be displayed on th€ RAD displav and the distsnc€ from tlle
shtio; will be dsplayed on th; DST display. There is no €ffect on anv other data
output.
12.
-- OFF/PULL ID CON'IROL - Rotarv
*i"",
power to the KNS-SI
pulled"ppli".
out to hear vOR ident.
swttch/potentio-meter.which' when turn€d dmkincreases NAV audio l€vel The switch mav be
;nd
Figure 1 King Area Nav (Type KNS-81), Kine DME Control/Indicator
(Type KDI-5?2) and Associated CDI Controls (Sheet 2 of 5)
1 June 1987
SUPPLEMENT 25
3 of 11
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
13. DATA tsU'flON - Momentsry
() <) display to change from
pushbutton which, when prcssed, causes the caret
FRQ to RAD to DST and back to FRQ.
14. DATA INPUT CONTROL - Dual
.out"
concentric knobs with the center knob havinq an "in"
position.
and
FREQUIINCY DATA: The out€. knob varies the fr€quency from 108 lo 117 MHz in
I MHz steps. The cent€r knob varies ftequency fmm .00 to .95 MHz in .05 MHz
steps with the knob in iis "in" and 'out" position.
RADIAL DATA: The outer knob va.ies the t€ns digit q'ith a carryover occuning from
the tens to hundrcds position. The center knob in tbe'in" position varies the units
digit and in th€ "out" position varies the tenths digit.
DISTANCE DATA: 'l'he outer knob varies the tens digit with a canyover occurr;ng
to hundreds plac€. The cent€r knob in the "in" position varies the units
ftom the
in the "out" position varies the t€nths digit.
digit and "ens
VORTAC,AMAYPOINT displayed in .l
nauticsl mile increments up to 99.9 NM, then in increments of one nautical mile to 389
15. DISTANCE DISPI"AY DME distance to
NM.
16. SELECTED MODE ANNUNCIATOR '
(1): NAV
(20).
1?.
Displays the DME operatins MODE; NAV 1
mode selector switch
2 (2); NAV r HOLD (1H); NAV 2 HOLD (H2) of the
GROUND SPEED DISPLAY - Displays ground speed up to 999 knots. Gmurd speed is
accurate only when flying directly to or ftom the station (VOR mode) or waypoint
(RNAV rnode).
18. RNAV ANNUNCIATOR (RNV) 'Indicates RNV when displayed data is in r€lation to
the RNAV walpoint. If the wrong DME mode is select€d during RNAV operation, th€
RNV annunciator will flash.
r9.
TIME-TO-STATION/WAYPOINT DISPLAY - Displays time'to-station (VOR mode)
or time-to waFoint (RNAV mode) up tr] 99 minut€s. Time-to-shtion infomation is
accurate only when flying dircctly to cr from the station or waypoint.
20. DME MODE SELECTOR SWITCH '
Applies power
to the DME and
selects DME
operating modes as follows:
OFF: Turns the DME Ot'F.
Nav
I
(N1): Selecre DME op€mtion with No.
selection by
NAV I frequency selector controls.
I
VHF navisation seq enables chann€l
Figure 1. King Area Nav (Type KNS-81), King DME Control/Indicator
(Trpe KDI-572) and Associated CDI Controls (Sheet 3 of 5)
SUPPLEMEN'T 25
of
11
1 June 1987
sEcloN 9
SUPPLEI\,'IENTS
MODEL 406
HOLD (HLD): Selects DME memory circuiti DME remains channeled to station.to
which it was last channeled when HOLD was sel€ct€d and will continue to displav
information .elative to thjs channel Allows both the NAV r and NAV 2 navigation
receivers to be set to new operational frequencies without affecting the pr€viou.ly
selected DME operation.
CAUTION
h the EOLD mode there is no annunciation of the VOR/DME
station frequency. However, an snnunciator, labeled "lH" or "H2"'
illundinat€s on the DME display to flag tbe pilot thrt the DME k in
the HOLD dode, RNAV will b€ inoperative wher on HOLD.
NAV 2 (N2): Selects DME operation with No. 2 VHF navisation set; enabl€s clannel
selection by Nav 2 frequeniy s€l€ctor switches. N2 must b€ select€d for RNAV
operation if connect€d to NAV 2. NAV 1 must be selected for RNAV op€ration if
connected to NAV 1.
Brightness
of the labels lor this swilch is controlled bv the radio lighi dimming
2t. COURSE INDEX Indicates
select€d
VOR/RNAV coune
NAVICATION FLAG (NAV) - When visible, red NAV flas indicatrs unreliable
VOR/RNAV/LOC signals or improperly operating equipment. Flag disappears when a
22.
reliable VOR/RNAV,/LOC sisnal is being rec€ived
TO-FROM 1NDICATOR Operates only wit}l a VOR or RNAV signal With usable
VOR/RNAV signal, indicates whether selected course is "TO" or "FROM"
station/walpoint. With usable localizer signal th€ indicator is not in view.
24. GLIDE SLOPE DEVIATION
25.
NEEDLE lndicat€s deviation from ILS slide slope'
COURSE DEVIATION POINTER
RNAV course or localiz€r centerlin€
- Indicates couFe deviation from
select€d omni or
26. RECIPROCAL COURSE INDEX - Indicat€s reciprocal or s€lecied VOR/RNAV course
27.
OMNI BEARING SELECTOR
28. OBS COURSE
CARD
(OBS)
Rotates OBS course card
to
select desired
Indicates selectad VOR/RNAV couse under couse index'
29. GLIDE SLOPE FLAG (GS) - When visible, red GS fiag itidicat€s unreliable glide slope
signal or improperly operating equipment- Flag disappea$ when a reliable glid€ slop€
signal is being received.
1. King Area Nav ('type KNS-81), King DME Contrcl/Indicator
Figure
- (Tlpe
KDI-5?2) and Associaied CDI Controls (Sheet 4 of 5)
SUPPLEMENT 25
1 June 1987
5 of
11
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENIS
MODEL 406
30. BACK OOURSE LIGHT (BC) The 1000 autnpilot
BC lieht (shown) will illumrnate
amber when a localizer frequency is selected qs the active wa'?oint frequency and when
back-course operation is selected by the BC (Back Course) mode selector pushbutton on
the 1000 IFCS mode selector unit (if installed). BC lisht dimnins is available by th€
RADIO light dimmi.g rheostat.
CAUTION
WheD €otrn€cted to NAV 2 and back-cours€ operatiotr is selected,
the cour€e (omDi) devistion bar (26) od the CDI will revers€ and
cau6e the localizer si$ral to the autopilot to revefte for bsck-course
operatioD. When contrected to NAV l, the IISI will not reverse but
the localizer signal is reverEed in the sutopilot for bsck course
oPeration.
Figure 1. King Area Nav (T1pe KNS-81), King DME Control/Indicator
(Type KDI-5?2) and Associated CDI Controls (Sheet 5 of 5)
1 June 1987
sEcloN
MODEL 406
9
SUPPLEMENTS
SECTION 2
LIMITATlONS
The following RNAV IFR approach limitation must be
adhered
airplane operation.
OPERATING LIMITATION:
1.
IFR Approaches -- Follow approved published RNAV instrument proceoures.
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when this avionic
equipment ig installed.
sEcTloN
4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT:
AREA NAVIGATION FUNCTIONAL TEST:
The following procedure applies only to ai4orts equipped with, or in range
of, a collocated VOR/DME station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
OFF/PULL IDENT Control -- TURN ON
MODE Control -- SELECT VOR mode.
DME FUNCTION Switch -- SELECT N1 or N2 depending on svstem
selected.
OBS Knob - SET so needle is ccntered with "FROM" indicationRAD Display -- ENTER a waypoint radial angle equal to the OBS value
determined in step 2.
DST Display -- ENTER a walpoint distance equal to the indicated
DME value.
'| June 1987
SUPPLEMENT 25
7 ot
11
SECIION 9
MODEL 406
SUPPLEMENTS
?.
MODE CONTROL 'SELECT RNV mode.
The KNS-81 is operating properly
1,0
NM and the couBe deviation
if
the DME distance to wa5point is
less
needle rs within a dot of being centered.
PROGRAMMING:
Pe inent information (walpoint number, station frequency, waypoint radial,
and walpoint distance) for up to ten walpoints is entered into the memory.
Programming may be completed prior to takeoff or during flight. Any combinatiorr of navigational facilities (RNAV wal4roint, VOR/DME, ILS) may be loaded
the computeq however, it is desirable that each facility be numbered and
in rhe sequence in which it is to be used.
V WAYPOINTS:
t.
OFF/PULL IDENT Control -- TURN ON.
1
2.
WPT CONTROL Knob -- SELECT watpoint
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
either direction to get "1".
DATA INPUT Control -- SELECT frequency for walpoint 1.
DATA Button -- PRESS to move > ((caret) from FRQ to RAD.
DATA INPUT Control -- SELECT radial fo. waypoint 1.
DATA Button -- PRESS to move ) ( (caret) from RAD to DST.
DATA INPUT Control -- SELECT distance for walpoint 1.
SEQUENCE 2 thru 7 -- REPEAT for all the waypoints desired up to a
maximum of t€n.
Turn the knob in
NOTE
VOR and ILS data are entered
in a similar manner except,
RAD and DST entries are not required.
INFLIGHT USE:
OFF/PULL IDENT Control -- PULL ON.
DME FUNCTION Switch -- SELECT Nl or N2 depending on system
1.
2.
selected.
WPT CONTROL Knob -- ROTATE as required to select the desired
wa5rpoint number. The waypoint iaformation (frequency, radial, and
distance) associated with the WPT number will be displayed in their
3.
respective displays.
WAYPOINT Display (WPT) -- OBSERVE that WPT is blinking indicating that the waypoini is a preview waypoint and noi the active
waVDolni.
SUPPLEMENT 25
of
11
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
DATA INPUT Control
'' SEI FRQ, RAD,
and DST as
desired
preview walpoint is to be rnodified'
NOTE
it
is lhe active walpornt
the data input tFRQ'
by
Jr'r' pr*i"*'*r'l""int. will be affecr€d
control.
DST)
and
RAD,
Only the displayed waypoint. wherher
6.
RETURN gn1161 (RTN) -' PRIISS
to the active walPoint number'
if it
is desircd to return the displav
NOTE
7.
until
The wawoint conrrol knob may also be manually rolated usrng
the activl waj|poinl, number is again displayed ln lreu ol
the RTN Pushbutton.
(blinking WPT)
USE Button -- PRESS if it is des ed to place preview
f ",'iiifi iT'd1'.t*-utthat.wPrisnot
8.fi
" iily"#tri?r'ilt3""ffactive
waJ&oint- is now displaled'
910.
i.ilcatfi tut the
,--- *mode
navigation
i;?H;'i.;;;;":--JELEcr ii"i'"a o"pp.ropiiate
PRESS ir ihe.radial rrom the
ii;fi;;;;1;;" iruol
be displaved on the DME knots displav
wi
i"ai"r
ir'"
dd]JJ
il;i"";
station display'
"i".g ",ltft
ar "F' on the DME time to
NOTE
The radial switch (RAD) is noi the momentary tJPe' therefore'
DME informath"
-,r"i Lt pt".t"a again for the normal
"*ii"n
tion to be disPlaYed.
11.
12.
oBS Knob -- sELEcr desired course
the raw VoR and DME data rs
be displaved in thetAD
will
vOn
ti,"
X*i"*1.^t-r'""t"iriii-'displav
be displaved in the DST displav'
will
VOR
;;;'.t,e ;ilE;tJ;n"" tn tt "
CHECK Button (CHX) -- PRESS
KNS-81 OPERATIONAL NOTES:
-l.
rhe
bv
VOR MODE OPERATION -- VOR mode is selected of the
'turning
wa}pornt
left
to
the
ff4Onf .."t."f knob until VOR is displl{ed
is automat',callv tuned when
;;;b"". i; voR mode, the remote dMb
via the N1 or, N2 position
source
ln"'if',f S-sf is selected as the iuning
di"t"o""' ground speed and time to
The course
the VORTAC station rs displayed "n the DME display
." tit" nVfe indicator' Upon iu"k-o't'
SUPPLEMENT 25
1 June 1987
9 of
11
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
2.
MODEL 406
deviation indicator displays conventional anzular crosstrack deviation
from the selected course (110" fir.ll scale). Duiing VOR mode operation,
the RAD and DST displays show dashes.
VOR PARALLEL MODE OPERATION -- VOR pARALLEL mode is
selected by turning the MODE control knob uniil VOR pAR is disolaved
to the left of the waypoint number. If the syst€m is receiving valid
signals from a collocated VOR-DME facility, this mode provides a con_
stant cou$e width irrespective of the distance from the VORTAC and
normal DME information fu displayed on the DME indicator. The
cours€ deviation indicator displays t5 NM full scale from the select€d
course. The RAD and DST displays show dashes during operation in the
VOR PAR mode.
NOTE
a This
mode of operation is primarily used when the pilot desires
to fly a constant cou$e width io either side of the
selected VOR
course. By flying a VOR parallel course, the pitot is able to stav
up to a maximum of 5 NM to either side of the selected VOR
will not track a VOR
offset parallel course, but will track the selected base course in
course. The Sperry 1000 or IFCS autopilot
the parallel mode of operation.
. It
ie recommended that either the VOR mode or RNV ApR
of the VOR pAR mode for approach.
This procedure is recommended because the resolution of an off
mode be us€d instead
corrrse indication increases qrith decreasing distance to the sta_
tion in standard VOR mode and a tightei resolution of 11.25
NM erists in the RNV APR mode, but the resolution remains
constant ( +5 NM tull scale) in the VOR pAR mode.
3.
4.
ENROUTE RNAV MODE OPERATION -- ENROUTE RNAV MODE
is s€lected by_ tuming the MODE control knob until RNV is displayerl to
the right of the wa5rpoint number. If the system is receiving vali'i Jignals
from a collocated VOR-DME facility, tliis mode providJs a constant,
course width and DME information to the walpoint. The course de_
viation indicator displays 15 NM full scale from iie selected course.
RNAV APPROACH MODE OPERATION __ RNAV AppROACH mode
is
by turning
MODE control knob until RNV ApR is
to the nght ot-the
the waypoint number. If lhe system is receiving
valid signals from a collocated VOR-DME facility, this mode provides i
constant course width and DME information to the wayp;int, The
course deviation indicator displays a I l/4 NM full scaie from the
selected course. For RNAV approaches, the RNV ApR mode is normally
selected prior to final approach cou$e inl,erception.
selected
orsprayeo
SUPPLEMENT 25
10 of 11
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
ILS
an
MODE OPERATION -- ILS mode is selected bv selecting
5.
" ILS
frequency
ILS
an
Whenever
il;t;;;; f." the active wavpoint frequencv
the same
-rem-ains
is the actrve wayporn! lrequency' the mode display
RAD
and DST
the
6rt
APR)
nxv
iiriC* ?tii, vo'fi ian, dNv oi
is p::]-id"d i"
deviation
angula{
conveniional
onlv
)irri.u" *"'Lr-t"d.
"tull scale deviation from course ce.nterline is
;l:"Tii ;ili;;;inal
and t0'7ofor. the glide slope)'
localizer at -o"i-lo*tiottt
t2.5ofor the
"a""i"tlon
tfr"""o*t"
6'6,';;;til
pointer function can be reversed for back course
pushtutton on the
il lr'! eA'cr cRS mode. selector
Absence of^thc LOC/GS
1000 IFCS rDode s€lector
ii"*f""Ji" ""t""".tea
u"'t
Uv tfre
if
in"tatt"at
NeV and GS flags in the CDI or HSI'
sEcTloN
5
PERFORMANCE
when this
11i.11t:^"qutpt""'
There is no change to the airplane performance
t.
t"#ft'd.'"i;il"*:-th;;{1"'-'"*tAl'tii"ltr"T*e'jl.i::"il""1"*";"i?"*X:"":'
related eaterDal antcnnas, wrlMgulr
1 June 1987
SUPPLEMENT 25
11 of 11
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
SUPPLEMENT
KING AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
(Type KMA-24H-70)
sEcTloN
1
GENERAL
The King Audio Control Panel (Type KMA-24H-70) is- a compact solid
unit containi-ng all operating conlrols on the front of the unit'
There are two control knobs on the far left of the panel for intercom control,
ten push button switchee on the top center of the palel for speaker audio c
ten push button switches on the bottom center of -the panel for phone
ol -d two control knobs on the far right of the panel for a
"o.rt
function Mic s€lect gwitrh and a spea.ker auto switch.
The electrical power required for operation of the audio- cofitrol panel's
headphone and/or speaker functions is supplied by RH AVIONICS BUS through
a 'p,-tlt-off type circuiL breaker labeled AUD PRI.
TNTERPHONE (INTERCOM SYSTEM)
The interphone system consists of a hot mic volume control and an intercom
VOf ivoice) sensitivity
control which are controlled by the two control knob€ ou
the far left of ihe panel. The inner control knob controls the intercom
ouly and does not affect the other inputs. .The-outer tontrol .fnob,1|en
to the detent position provides hot mic operation When rotated
n iii
i^ 1."-oa
iha
L".l' selects
Relecls intercom VOX (voice) sensitivity
range,
the control
midde
to
ihe"f""f.t*
-iear.
"^';'.1 knob
the voice activated intercom aud'io
knob
adjusts
u"a ltt" rotation oi this control
level.
SPEAKER/PHONE (COM/NAV/DME/MKR & ADF) MONITOR PUSHBUTTONS
The audio panel incorpolates in the center of the panel two rows of ten
Dushbutton switches, Iabeled SPEAKER on the top row and labeled PHONE on
ifi" bott rrr row. These pushbuttons permit the pilot or copibt to monitor the
va"ioue c;nutu"l"utions and navigation systems available.to the.operator' When
depressed, each pushbutton connects ita respective na-vrgatlon ancl/or commumcato ;ither the sp€ater (top row of pushbuttons) or the headphones
llJo
"yst€(bottoia
row of pushbuttons). To disconnect a communication or navigation
system from eithe; the sp€aker or headphones, depress the desired pushbutton a
second tiure.
1 June 1987
SUPPLEMENT 26
1of 5
sEcTtoN
I
MODEL 406
SUPPLEI\4ENTS
Mrc SELECT SWTTCH (TNCLUDTNG EMG, pA & EXT pOStTtONS)
A multiple function MIC selector control swikh is located on the far right of
tfie parel and is the inner confol knob. In the COM position (1 thru 4),
microphone and audio keying are routed to the gelect€d tralsceiver and the
speaker amplifier is connected to the cockpit speaker. In the PA position, keyed
microphone audio is rout€d to the aft cabin speakers for passenger address. The
EXT (erternal ramp hail speaker) position is not uged in this install,ation. In the
EMG position, the microphone and headphones are connected directly to COM 1
aa a means of failsafe communications in the event of a failure within the Audio
Control Parel or on the RH AVIONICS BUS.
SPEAKER AUTO SELECT SWITCH
The SPKR AUTO selector control is located on the far rieht of the Danel
and is the out€r coDtrol knob. When rhe SPKR AUTO switchls oulled out. it
will automatically s€lect the audio from the transceiver selected bv the MIC seiect
switch to be heard on the cockpit spea-ker.
sEcTtoN 2
LIMITATIONS
There is no change to the airplane limitations when t}lis avionic equipment
is installed.
lf'"??rr""t
rt
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
KMA-z4II-7O AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
r'voxRELEASEADJUSTMENT-TheVoXrleasepotisAcc$s;blethmuehIhe,maj|
' i"'i"'i"-,r'" i.;* left corna of rhp fr nr Danel clockwise sdju'tment wrrr rncrease rne
ended vOX release should be
rime that the intercom remarns t" "ii"t'"p""ttt has
adjusted to suit user Prcferenc€'
2
r
NrERcoM
jn"f*'t:
rvorcE,, sENS''j$II.SllT,[".'.;,]:fl
;" \l.'"'"ff,
posrtio'j".i l:1-1i*^1".
adiusrs rhe sensilivitv ol the vorce activaLed
vox
clo{k',,ise detlnr
vii,ilili"r'f !':,:1ii;:."?"{1:ir::hril;1{;rt*nt.si**rl*'r::llxl
:i"'#tr;it'-"".lliilf.Tl$fl ":hiift ,ri"l,iL,"*"axr'J",fl
power
lffi::I":fi: i.ffi:"lfii: il"['il:;:; ;#;;;' ;;"h';; wlen marine rarse'1""'I:
changes.
rNrERcgM vor-uMx
cglllgl
T"ln:'F:il":ij:ffi
-,TIt,ll,T"i?"jir*ffiIifl:
contn l. This adjusts the intercom vorume
wlen either the pilot or copilor' kc)s the microphone 10 trangmrr'
;""";;;;;l;;rr"
'*":ilr";s::,ntlm[1ru'*s.:'lr:$* :nn'li' i:: I;l;'oi'ffi"i*::
(SPEAXER) - Select^r buhons for speaker
SPEAKER AUDIO SELECTOR BUT'|ONS
op"iuto-it i"f"cl anv onc or more audio sisn'ls
ardio outDut when press€d tn
"nuo'"" a sF ond Irme
To disconnect, depress lhe pushburbn
SPEAKER
AUro.swrTcl.:Jh:' .pY.il-:*;i:l".";TiTllll ;'J":i:','Jf
ixl*ii:1.*::59":t\::"T't'*,il'i'1r:l'i;;'""ir"r' i",i*'v"
$i;iJll"'.I:
h;ard on th€ head'
phones.
Control Syst€m Operating Controls
Fizure
- 1. King Audio (Sheei
1 of 2)
SUPPLEMENT 26
1 June 1987
3of5
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
MIC SELECT SWITCH (Including EMG, PA and EXT posftions) - tn the EMC
(Em€ rg€.ncy ) posit
_
ion, microphone 6udio, mircrophone key and headphones are conto COM L This providee failssle iornmunications in th; event of Audio
Panel Failure. In COM positions (1 ttrru 4), microphone audio ard keying is connected
to the appropdat€ transmitter and audio from the ielected receiver wili be heard on tne
spealer wlen the AUTO SPKR kDob is pdted ouL tn the pA positioo. keved micronect€d directly
phone audio is
loyted- to lhe aff. cabin speakels for passenger address. The
is noDfirnctional in this instr_Uation. Dudng trgnsmit all received audio
sidetone froE the select€d tlamEitt€r is h€rd on spesler and phones.
E*T
i!
posrion
mut€d and
HEADPHONES AIJDIO SELECTOR BUITONS (PHONE) - Setector buttons for
hesdpbon€ audio output. When pressed in, enabl€s headphone operation to anv one or
1.
more aucuo sBnals. 't o disconnect. depress rhe pushbutton(s) a second time.
Figure 1. King Audio Control System Oprerating Controls
(Sheei 2 of 2)
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
.
There is ao c-bange to the airylane emergency procedures when this avionic
equlpment lI} rnst€Ied.
NOTE
a This tlpe of audio control palel has independent. citcuits for
speak€r and headphone functions. Thus, one failure does nol
of both headphone and speaker audio. In case of
failure to tlansmit over the headset MIa, the operator mav still
be able to transmit using the hand-held MIC. (The hand-mike
jack is connected in parallel with the copilot,s headset jack. For
better modulation and less background noise, unplug- the co_
pilot's headset when using the hand_held MIC.)
cause the loss
a IF a complete failure of the audio conhol pan€l occurs. Dlace
the MIC select switch in the EMG posirion. The micropione
and headphones will be connected directly to COM 1 ag a
meaIrs of failsafe communications.
SUPPLEMENT 26
4of5
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
sEcTloN
4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
AUDTO CONTROL PANEL OPERATIONS:
1, MIC Select Switch -- SELECT desired conmunications transcerver
(COM 1, 2, 3 or 4 position) for.transmitting'
pri6itn
rfrvlrD .q'di" .qeleci Button(s).;, l-ElE93
bi"diribii aro/or
2,
- SPtlAl$j}(
""ili,i
,l""i"ed,
svsi"m
6bi,i7iln
-- to rngurtgl audio-over :t!hi: llti:lT:i
pushbutitip'i"*'"r i'""rtU"rtt"")- ttt" tt*dpnooes (bottom row of
s.
tons).
Selector Knob -- PULL
recerver'
commurtications
selected
on
audio
b"P;iKEn AUTO
il;"t;;i#il7*
ine level.
5.
6.
t?;;;;"
oUT for automatic
speaker
n"""iu". euaio Control -- ADJUST to desired listen-
INTERCoM VoL Control -- ADJUST to desired
level while u.sing hot mic.
i'Litdi'6'6tr"ibx (voi-cetsensitivirvcontrol--Rpr.ArE-c-o-Y1g^!
and then adjust as required
ilif'"i;."#;; ii'"' -iJar"- '-ei
-ml'ercom'
desired voice activation of hot mic
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
when this avionic
There is no change to the airplane peformance
is installed.
SuPPLEMENT 261
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
SUPPLEMENT
KING DIGITAL ADF
(Type KR-87)
sEcTloN I
GENERAL
automatic direcThe King Digital ADF is a panel-mounted' digitaU-y
-l-kHz-tuned tunins in the
digital
pio"icle
continuous
to
l"'d""ig""d
ti." ;;l;;.-li
nechanical
or zoolln, t" iigg-tir" -a etminat€s th9. r9ed.fot
H;;;;;&
tinet'
a built-in electronic
i?"'i""*it"-rtit'* ihe "y"t"m i" "o-ptit"a of a -receiver'
and
roop
ra-aae'"'.uined
#J. - u(drrr'ts uurwqw"
itJ".'lii*riiaii",ii
a
TIT
Kl-227 Kl-228 or
be a TPll1?,T*t:g
'
on the avionics optioDs installed' ih" indi""toi canDigital
are.shown and
AIF
King
tot
the
oopUl"
and
KI-229. Operating controls
i##Jil'ii*t r- rt " ",dio rv"ti- *ecl.ioin"9"r"',:!i9l.T1-t[T^T*%f:l
supplement 26 in section e
il
]JllHfi#;;1fti";i.-.;";;tJ;ribecl
this handbook.
can- be us€d for position plotting and homing
of amplitude-modulated (AM) signals'
reception
a,r."".-arrd for" auril
The
KiIg Digital ADF
proce-
The "flip-flop' frequencv displav allows tyit"li"c" -b,:1:T1
by pressing tr': lr-equ:i:v llTl:.:
---'-""
"sririibs.il"*i1,Aciil,E;-i."q";;;ies
in a non-volatile nemory circuit
a
ftequencies
pre-selected
ton. Both
"tot"i
'''i"""i'.1'""l"".iu*ii-J"a-al'pi"v"ainselr-dinminggas^g:i*"iH"*T;
fr
while the
ii'"o"ti""''ltii aitplaved in the Ieft window'readout
t"ff;it#;;;il
fro
from
selected
the
or
fiequency
Jri disPlaY
ai*f"" either the standbv
window
-i.i^- will
built-in electronic timer.
The built-in electrcnic timer has two separate ang,indeq:n9€:l
unit. is
J1ilg
on'
the
.tumed
ti""": i"r;";;;;; mgilitr."i-titti ttutt" *tt"tt"u""
timer
el:Fsed
An
timer functions up to 59 houls "oi-sg titt"t"t'
-wlich
q""""t
r- "o *" ss '.ninutes and 59 seconds
ryl"l,
:1ffi
"
ilis^-plaJ
:00'
reaches,
int€rval has b€en progtammed anJ the countdotvn
,the
uott' the fligrt timer .and :tfg':1,11T",1
ro.,cPExuvuurr' '" ^' r-":"'"'- '-"' -:-la"ing
ilfr
io,fic"to"" are internally lighted.
"lo#i",irir,'it^":d;;;-;;"il.;,t':r1T_T:lTi^g:"T1,,,*e,:*"ljlT
conlrols and l,ne or.
il."#il;
;;:i'?;t;;fu."si"""
The pushbutton
"iiv
i!
"."t".it"a
1 June 1987
Uv the radio light dimming rheostat'
SUPPLEMENT 27
1of 8
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENIS
MODEL 406
12ilt0$
KI.227 INDICATOR
KI.229 OPTIONAL RMI INDICATOR
14
ro
15
Kt-228 tNDtcAToR
Figure 1. King Digital ADF Operating Controls and Indicaton
(Sheet 1 of 3)
SUPPLEMENT 27
2ol 8
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
(ANT) is selert€d bv the'out" position of.the ADF'
MODE ANNUNCIATION
-"iJ" i'"p"ovesAntenna
for statioo identhe auret r"ception and is usuallv used
tiiti"l rli"
g0orelative positioD'
is deacrivate; and will park in tbe
ii"niii"". ft'" be*r"e'point€r
bv the depressed positioD of .thc
;i,ffi;;i Dt'Ji"" 'Filder (ADF) mode is select€d
bcains poinr'er'.The bearins point€r will pt rnt in
Lirilii*t. rf';" -"ae activales ihe
ii"-dlteciio" of th" st"tion rclative to the airplane heading'
ACTn'E FREQTIENCY DISPLAY - The freqxencJ to which.rhe
PF."*-P]* "
b" changed direcllv when eitler or the
;ip';fi il;;*Th; ;;tl'e eor r'"q*ncv
"ar
timer functioru are sPlected.
The B{O modg' activated.and arTlunBEAT FnEQUENCY
-"neo"OSCILLATOR (BFO) -pernits
the carrier wave and associated
button i! depressJ'
iit i *l*-trt"
mors€ code identiier broadcast on lhe csrrier wave lo lr€ beam'
NOTE
audio :vill :b: hea:d
CW sisnals (Morse Code) are unmodulat€d and no t}re
Unit€d Stat€e air
itFd. This'tlpe of sisnal is noi used in
;h"fi;;
t"ig"ii-. ri"ii" .*a i. some foreigrr countries and msrine beacons'
- when Fx,Q -is displav€d the
Jhe STANDBY rreouencv
displav
bsnd
rislt
in
rhe
displaved
il;"}cvls
3+fr6;i
STANDBY, frequency is put
seleded
Tbe
knobi
setecr
trequ""cy
trre
*i"i
i^""r""r"apresing the flequencv transfet button
(FRQ)
STANDBY FREQUENCY ANNUNCIATTON
ilt"
,qCffvt
i-1"
f."qtencv window bv
tr€quenry' tbe nisht rimer'
STANDBY FREQUENCY DISPLAY - Either rhe stsndbv timer.and
elapsed tiEer,a-re
iJ ii. ifitje€d.li-l- r' aisplaved in this position Tbe flisht blind Bemory
r'"q""oiv
i*"-;'ito
T
td&-itt
ti#;ff;"il";
"i'i"r
!r
back at snv trEe bv depressrng rne r rtQ button Flig,llt,lire
displsyed and anlruDciat€d alt€rnslively by depresstng
In€ rLtlr I
F-g'd
llme 3r€
^etapsed
uuL@n'
(ET) or flight time (FLT)
TIMER MODE ANNUNCIATION - Either the elapsed time
mode
7.
i.s
alnunciated herc.
st€ndbv .ftPqu€ntv when.FRQ ts
FREQUENCY SELECTOR NNOBS -- Selects the
either of the timer Nnctnns
c'/henever
tseduencv
sctite
l.be
ait".rlv
ai"pta-v"a ana
either.clockwi
"elecis
rotaled
be
knobs'mav
s€lector
ftequency
i"- iJi"t"a..'fft"
knob ;s pulled out.rn t"ne the.l's Tbe "P+ T,"b,:""Xyrl:l
rh*e
tun€s the I00's with rollover-into thejaltuos
t-i-" *" rbt Tte oui€r kn;bdu"ired
r*€d rn tne
eLaps€d iimer
lh€
wben
iime
tle
s.l
il;-;-d;-G-;
-
;'ilil;;. il" ;;ii
poT'.:{-l:]9-: ;ly'i
' controls primary power
l'o
i-- oFF.position appliee.primarv
,receivex..frrther
-irii.'
ca'$ei tbe audio output t,o b€
clockwise rotation rncreases &uttro t"u"t lua;6't"ti'"g
oFF/voLUME
'ciiil; coNIRoL (oFF/vOL)
il;:
ii,t"J
ual"ss rb" re"eiuer is locked on a valid st'ation
Fieure 1. Kine Disital
*,#i";""t;ti
and rndicators
""""ols
SUPPLEMENT 27
1 June 1987
3of8
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
SE1'/RESET BUT'TON (SET/RST)
elapsed timer wherher
- The set/reset
it is being d)splayed or nor.
button when D.essed resets rh€
FLIGHT TIME/ELAPSIID TIME MODE SELECTOR BUTTON GLT/ET) The
Flight Time./Elaps€d Time mode selector button wben pressed altemarely selects either
Flight Tim€r mode or Elapsed Time. mode
FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON (FRe) - The FRe transfer button when Dressed
erchanges the active and standby frequencies. The new frequency becomes active ard me
former aciive frequency goes into standby.
BFO BUTTON
- The BFO button
position. (See note under item 3.)
selects
the BFO mode when in the
depressed
ADF BUITON - The ADF button selects either the ANT mode or the ADF mode. The
ANT mode is selecied with the ADF burton in the out position. The ADF mode is
selected with the ADF button in the dep.essed posirion.
INDEX (ROTATABIE CAR.D) , Indicates r€lativ€, nagnetic, or true heading of air-
plane, as selected by HDC control.
POINTER_- Indicatps station bearing in desrees of azimuth, rclative to the nose of me
alrplane. when headins conrrcl is adjusrad, indicat€s rehtive, Dagnetic, o. rrue beanng
16.
ITEADING CARD CONTROL
Deanng rnronnatron.
(HDc)
Rotat€s card to s€t
in relative, magnetic, or rrue
77. DOUBLE-BAR POINTER - Indicat€s bea.ing of selected ADF station.
I8. HEADING INDEX - Indicates the ai.plane masnetic heading on the azimuth card.
19-
ROTATING AZIMUIH CARD Slaved to remore heading source; mtates as th€
airplane .turns so that the airplane magnetic heading is contiruously displayed at me
Figure 1. King Digital ADF Operating Controls and Indicators
(sheer 3 of 3)
SUPPLEMENT 27
4ofB
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
There is no change to ihe airplane limitations when this avionic
is installed.
sEcTloN
3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when this
equipment is installed.
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TO OPERATE AS AN AUTOMATTC DIRECTION FINDER:
1. OFF/VOL Control .. ON.
i. F""qu".t"y Selector Knobs -- SELECT desired frequency in the
frequencY disPlaY.
--3. FRb Bu;ton FRESS to move the desired frequency from the
active Position.
to t}le-SinafnR/PHONE
Selector Pushbutton(s) Switch (on audio cona. abf
trol panel) -- SELECT as desired.
Control -- SET to desired volume level'
5. OFFTVOL
e. ebf gtit"t -- SELECT ADF mode and note relative bearing on indicator.
ADF TEST (PRE-FLIGHT
OT
IN-FLIGHT):
1. ADF Button -- SELECT ANT mode and note pointer moves
90oposition.
pointer moves
2. ADi'Button -- SELECT ADF mode and not€
pointer sluggishness'
hesitation to the station bearing. Excessive
n
weak or a system malfuncing
ins or reversals indicate a signal that is loo weal
tron.
TO OPERATE BFO:
1.
2.
OFF/VOL Control -- ON.
BFO Button -- PRESS on.
SUPPLEMENT 27
1 June 1987
50Td
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
3.
4.
MODEL 406
ADF SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Buttons (on audio control panel)
SET to desired mode.
VOL Control - ADJUST to desired listeninE level.
NOTE
A
1000-Hz tone and Morse Code identifier is heard in the audio
output when a CW sigral is received.
OPERATE FLIGHT TIMER:
1.
2.
3.
OFF/VOL Control -, ON.
FLT/ET Button -- PRESS (once or twice) until FLT is annunciated.
Timer begins counting at takeoff and "holds" at touchdown.
OFF/VOL Control -- OtrF and then ON if it is desired to reset the flisht
tlmer.
OPERATE AS A COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER ONLY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
OFF/VOL Control -- ON.
ADF Button -- SELECT ANT mode.
Frequency Selector Knobs -- SELECT desired frequency in the staldby
frequency display.
FRQ Button -- PR"ESS to move the desired frequency from the Btandby
to the active position.
ADF SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Buttons (on audio control panel) -SET to desired mode.
VOL Control -- ADJUS'I to desired listening level.
OPERATE ELAPSED TIME TIMER.COUNT UP MODE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
OFF/VOL Control - ON.
FLT/ET Button -- PRESS (once or twice) untit FLT is annunciated.
SET/RST Buttoq - PRESS until the ET annunciation besins to flash.
SET/RST Butr,on -- PRESS to start timer.
SET/RST Button -- PRESS to stop time!. Timer will reset zero. When
the SET/RST button is released the timer will start to count asain
unless the SET/RST bu+tpn is held until the ET annunciation flashei.
NOTE
The Standby Frequency which is in memory while Flight Time
or or Elapsed fime modes are being displayed may be called
back by pressing the FRQ button, then transfered to active use
by pressing the FRQ butLon again.
SUPPLEMENT 27
6of8
1 June 1987
sEcroN 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
TO OPERATE ELAPSED TIME TIMER-COUNT DOWN MODE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
OFF/VOL Control -- ON.
fiiini g"fio" -- PRESS (once or tq'ice) until ET is annunciated'
sei'/RSt Srtt"" -- PRESS until the ET annunciation begins to flash'
FREOUENCY SELECTOR KNOBS -- SET desired time in the e
tge. the 1's' Thc
li-" ii"pf"v. The small knob is pulled out tqknob
tunes minutes up
inoU i" io"it"a in io tune the 10's. The outer
59 minut€s.
NOTE
after
Selector knobs remain in the time set mode for 15 seconds
ift"-i..i "tt"v
is pressed.
or until the SET/RST, FLT/ET or FRQ button
SET/RST Button -- PRESS to start couutdown' When the
i"""fr"" o, it will start to count up as display flashes for 15 seconds'
NOTE
Wirile FLT or ET are displayed, the active frequency on the left
the frequency
side of the window may be changed by using
gtored st€ndby lreselector knobs, wiihout any effect on rhe
queucy or the other modes.
ADF OPERATIONAL NOTES:
PHENOM'
ERRONEOUS ADF BEARING DUE TO RADIO FREQUENCY
ENA:
United States, the FCC, which assigns -AM radio frequencies' occaIn the
an area'
*'lff- u".ign the s"ame frequency Lo more than one- station, in
sl'ations to
from
such stations
ftom
signals
cause
may
"iotruiiu
bff""i,
Night
Night
as
i:iilii
such
Certain conditions,
"".iiti."-"..
^"v
when using AM broadcast
iftft should be take; in; consideration
.r"tf"r.
station for navigation.
phenomena may occasionally -distort reception so
Sunspots
-Jig"li" - and atmospheric
For this
overlap.
f".- t*o stations on the same frequency will
of. the- station being
identification
positive
make
io
wise
alwavs
is
;;;;:"it
i"iJ,'U" "Ut"n"iJ the tunciton selictor to ANT and listening for station call
lett€rs.
tft"t
SUPPLEMENT 27
1 June 1987
7
oII
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
STORMST
In the vicinity of electrical su)rms, an ADF indicator pointer tends to swin€i
from the station tuned toward the center of the storm.
NIGHT EFFECT:
This is a disturbance particularly strong just after sunset and just after dawn.
pornter may swing
indicator pointer
An AlJl
Ar
ADF
{DF mdrcator
swrng erratlcally
possible,
erraticallv at these times. lf
erratically
If possible,
oossible. tune
to the most powerful station at the lowest frequency. If this is not possible, take
the average of pointer oscillations to det€rmine relative station bea ng.
MOUNTAIN EFFECT:
Radio waves reflecting from the surface of mountains may cause the pointer
bearing. This should be taken into accouni
when taking bearings over mountainous terrain.
to fluctuate or show an erroneous
COASTAL REFRACTION:
Radio waves may be refracted when passing from land to sea or when moving
parallel to the coastline. This also should be taken into account.
SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no cbalge to the airplane performance when this avionic equipment
is installed. However, the installation of an externally mount€d antenna or related
ext€rnal ant€nnas, will regult in a minor reduction in cruise performance.
SUPPLEMENT 27
8of8
'| June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
SUPPLEMENT
KING DIGITAL COMM
(Type KY-196)
SECTION
1
GENERAL
The King KY-196 Digitat Comm, Shown in Figule 1' c.oLsrsls of a nanelmounted receiver-tlansmitter. The set includes a ?20-channel Vtt! communrca1
iio""- t"""it"*tt-"mitter which receiveg and transmits signals between
and 135.975 MHz with 25-kHz spacing'
KY-196 hae four modes of operation: Frequengy mode; Channel mode;
The
mode ol
Freouencv mode
o-^-^*-r-- mode;
mode' The Frequency
T\rning mode.
Direct T\rninc
---i Programming
Channel
-^i.. r)irorr
frequency
standby
in
ihe
frequency
tune
a
aUt" ihe;ilot to .-i 6.tiua franrrpnnips- The Channel mode
-':';i....- j1^-- li^
-+^-nL.,, and active fr-equencies'
"""."ti*
the standby
"nip-nop"
Channel numbers to be recalled
"iJitr""
;J;;d;"G""i*
-J-ii" ".-".ponding
is momentarilv displaved in the ac^tive (USE)
chu.'r,"l n,t-b""
;":;;;;;Til
i."o,l"n"v altpluv and the conesponding frequency is displayed in rhe STANDBY
pllot t' progam
f""ouenc-v displav. The Channel Programming mode allows the
T\rning mode
Direct
The
of
operation
*ode
Ctt""t"r
in"
i;;;;"'";;i;;
"""-i"
*rii"n aro*t freq'encv changes to be made directlv into the
i:: ;;::l:;;-;il
active frequincY disPlaY'
Large self-diurming gas discharge readouts- displav
-:!..
'1" :"3:yI11t:I
featur"
fti- tso s ,tiiq,l"-'nip-flop" pre-select
rvui
rrreqr'!
TPt^"-t
"."t#g'i""q"*"-i"".-C-ft'"
one tiequency rn [ne slal
to store
"ir-t"r"ft""g"
the; inst.antly with the touch of a button' Both the called
il""
frequencies are stored in a circuit component
standby
thJ
ii;.SEi."a
b"ei"oli'ieb";rr"Jiv irt"."6r" Read ontv Memory) thaL provides
.non-volatile
and prograrnmed channels so that when the radio is turned
i"."*"
"f'fi"qt"""iei
tn"n back on, channel inlormation is retained'
oii
Eta!ur6
I::
"ia
an automatic squelch To override the automatic
The COMM incorporates
is pulled out Push the knob back in t'o
knob
c'ontiol
ifti"".ft-"
."""f"it,
relactivate the automatic squelch.
SUPPLEMENT 28
1 June 1987
1of
I
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENIS
MODEL 406
OPERATING COMM FREQUENCY DISPLAY (USE) - Displays active communication frequency or the cbann€I number when selecting or programming channels.
TRANSMIT INDICATOR
tmnsmit mode.
, "T,
appears
to indicat€ that the
transceiver
is in
me
3. STANDBI
COMM FREQUENCY DISPLAY (STANDBY) - Disptays Btsrdby commu,
nication frequeDcy or during channel pro$ameing the programrned frequeoiy is dis-
I.
I,,TOOT
a.
TNBQUENCY/CHANNEL SELECTOR:
FREQUENCY
MODE
The outer, lalge! sele€tor knob is used to chanse the MHz
portion of the frequency display: the smalt knob chanses the kHz p6rtion. This
smalle_r k-nob
is designed to .hange rhe indicated frequenry in sr,ps of sd-kHz when ;t
f!t{ -11, and in 25 kHz steps when it is pu ed out. At eitirer band_edge of the
f8-135 MHz frequency spectrum, sn offscab;ot tion will wrap the displa! around
f_
the other frequency band-edge (i.e_, 185 MHz advances to 118 MHz).
b. CHANNEL MODE - The small knob
when pulted out s€lects channels
I thru
9.
Channel numb€B without. a programmed frequency will be skipped. The s€lected
urranner numDer w'lt b€ dl.sptay€d for approximately 2 seconds in active frcquency
drspky and. ihe conesponding programmed fr€quency is displayed in the stsndby
rrequency drsphy. lhe out€r, larger s€lector knob snd the $rxaller knob (when it is
pNhed in) tunction as described in "a". except that the smaller knob always changes
the indicat€d frequency in 25-kHz steps.
c. CHANNEL
PROGRAMMINC MODE
channels 0 thru 9.
- The
small knob when pulled out
serecrc
(1).
.With Channel 0 displayed , The smal knob when pushed in setects either , ,
which indicat* opemtion in the Frequency mode or UUU which indicates operation
in the Channel
Elode.
Figure 1. King KY-196 Tranceiver (Sheet 1 of 2)
SUPPLEMENT 28
2ot8
1 June 1987
sEcTtoN 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
(2) With a Channel Number I thlu 9 displaved - wiih small knob pushed in' s€lects
ihi frequency in the standby display in 25 KHz st€ps. The out€r' larger selector knob
functions as desnibed in "a".
d. DIRECT-TUMNC MODE - The
kDobs tunction as descdbed
COMM VOLUME CONTROL (OFF/PULL TEST)
in "a"'
- Rotarv switch/potentiometlr
which, when turned clockwise, applies power t the KY-196 and adjr8ts volume of
communication rec€iver audio. WL-n puiled out disables automatic squelch and allows
bsckground nois€ to be heaid to vedfy squelch test.
(<+) - Int€'-changes-the frequencies
sf,tNosv displays. when pressed and held depressed for.3 S€conals,
ahe usE
"ita
Programming mod€. When held depressed while the radro power 1l
select€ the Cb-annel
tumed on, selects the Direct-Tuning mode
COMM FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON
i;
Figure 1. King KY-196 Tranceiver (Sheet 2 of 2)
SUPPLEMENT 28
1 June 1987
3of8
SECTION 9
MODEL 406
SUPPLEMENTS
All controls for the Kine KY-196 are
mounted on the front Danel
of the
-transmitt€r. Control lighting is provided by the instrument panel flood
system. Operation and description of the audio control panel used rn
with this radio are shown and described in Supplement 26 in Section
of this handbook.
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
There is no change to the ai4larre limitations when this avionic equipment
is installed.
sEcTroN 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when this avionic
pment is installed. However, if the frequency readouts fail, the following
should be followed.
RADIO DISPLAY FAILURE:
1.
COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST -- TURN counterclockwise
to OFF position.
2.
3.
-- PRESS and HOLD DEPRESSED.
COMM Transfer Button (+)
COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise; pull
out and adjust to desired audio level; push control back in to activate the
automatic squelch.
NOTE
The radio is now in the Direct Tuning Mode. The active and
standby ftequencies are set tp 120.00 MHz. The frequency selector knobs can be used to dilectly tune the active hequency.
4.
MODEAREQUENCY/CHANNEL Selector - The outer, larger selector
knob will change the numbers to the left of the decimal one MHz per
click. The smaller knob when pushed in changes the number to the right
of the decimal 50 kHz per click and 25 kHz per click when pulled out.
Therefore if the frequency 121.50 was desired, the larger knob would be
turned one click clockwise and the smalle! knob pushed in and tumed 10
clicks either clockwise or counterclockwise.
SUPPLEMENT 28
4of8
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
OPERATING MODE SELECTION'
1. COMM Volume Conhol (OFF/?ULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise until
radio comes on.
2. Coili4 Transfer Button ('<+) '- PRESS and HOLD DEPRESSED
3.
"'
selector .-- lul-l our and
ilbffETFiiEanENcY/cHANNEL
-tmall
(0)
appears in the active flequency
zero
unti.l
knob
iib-t"ale tl"
for three secondB.
n.
displav.
RoTATE'
i,r-6frinnEeuENcY/CHANNEL Selector -- PUSH IN and
Select either --- or UUU'
freWten the MODE Selector knob is rotat€d, the standby
que""v Jispluv
*i[
altemate between --- and UUU'
a. The FREQUENCY Mode is selected when dashes (--) are
pLaved.
t. lTi drfeNNel, Mode is select€d when (UUU) is displaved'
-- PRESS to retum to the
5. COMM Trarefer Button (*)
operating mode.
NOTE
th€ unit will
Aft.er 20 seconds of no switch/selector activity',
mooe'
op€latrng
autoDatically retum to the select€d
FREOUENCY MODE
t?ivV#r.ift iiiot{-nncervEn-rRAN
sM
lrrE
R o PERArlo
N:
-- SET tpthis mdio'
Selector Switch (on audio control .panel).
1. MIC
^Sfi;fiil/iioNE
(on
control panel) -- sET
audio
Selectoi-B'rttons
;.
this radio,
:.
" 6drriffi'voru-"
;;;.al,l"lL
,.
Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise'
aoi""a u"dio leve! push control back in to activate
-ilSo'6li#b"t!"$;ocY/cHANNEL serector Knobs sELEcr
"F".t#y"'$"iff*J+8flt.s"1GJ.*1,;.i*i:3,B"5*ll;i;'SUPPLEMENT 28
1 June 1987
5of8
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
Mike Button:
To Transmit -- DEPRESS and SPEAK into microDhone.
a.
NOTE
o During COMM trarsmission, a lighted ,,T, will
appear between
the "USE" and 'STANDBY" displays to indicat€ that the transceiver is operating in the transmit mode.
a
Phone sidetone may be eelected by pushing the AUTO selector
button (on audio control panel) in the phone position,
b.
To Receive -- RELEASE mike button.
CHANNEL MODE
MMUMCATION RECETVER-TRANSMITTER OPERATION:
1.
2.
3.
4.
MIC Selector Switch (on audio control panel) -- SET to this radio.
SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Buttons (on audio control panel) -- SET t
this radio.
COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise: pull
out and adjust to desired audio leve! push control back in to activate'the
automatic squelch.
MODEAREQUENCY/CHANNEL Setector Knobs -- SELECT desired
operating channel (Pull out and rotate smaller knob).
NOTE
The Channel number will be displayed in the active display and
the correspo-nding programmed frequency in rhe standbi display. The Channel number will only be displayed for approx!
mately 2 seconds, after which the o ginal aitive frequency will
again be displayed.
COMM Tr-ansfer Button (+)
-- PRESS to transfe! the progratlmed
frequency ftom the "STANDBY" display into the "USE" dispiay.
MIC Button:
6.
a.
To Transmit -- DEPRESS and SPEAX into microphone.
NOTE
.
qurilq_qOMM transmission, a light€d ,"T" will appear between
the'USE" and "STANDBY" displays to indicate that the tra.rl_
sceive! is operating in the transmit mode.
SUPPLEMENT 28
6of8
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
a
selector
Phone sidetone may be selected by pushing the .AUTO
button (on audio control panel) in the phoDe posrtron'
CHANNEL PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION:
1.
COMM Transfer Button
z.
aecon(l8.
--
PRESS and HOLD depressed for
ftriiiHlrnneuENCY/cHANNEL selector Krobs -- OPERATE as fol
lows:
until the desired
Knob -- PULL OUT and ROTATE
-"]""S-"U
n"-Ue. (1 tbfl 9) apPears in the active display'
b. Smslt Knob -- PUSH IN.
L"tg"i Xt"U -- ROTATE to select the MHz portion of the
".
a.
e.
f.
of the frequencv
the- kHz
-portion
Bteps'
25
kHz
in
is
changed
frequency
ttte
in Gs--ode,
to I channels;
i""*"i i""u -- ROT;\TE'Io pro$am in up
Lo ---' When
135
from
countprcloikwise
--or
i"
fr;i--l18
whose
chamel
i" tft" CUel.INnl mode, any
Siilfiti<".t
-- ROTATE to select
u"tit At tU"
desired channels are programmed'
COMM T"aosfer Button -- PRESS to return to the
s€lected
mode.
NOTE
o- After 20 seconds of no switch/selector activity'. the unit will
automatically retuin to the selected operating mode'
q,still
a While in the Channel Programming mode the. radio
unantuned to the active frequency which was active when lhe
nel Programning mode was entered
DIRECT-TUNING MODE OPERATION:
1.
z.
COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN
to OFF Position'
b"OMU
ti"-"r"r
Button
(<-)
-- PRESS and HOLD DEPRESSED.
SUPPLEMENT 28
1 June 1987
7 ol
8
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
3.
MODEL 406
COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise until
radio comes on.
NOTE
The radio is now in the DIRECT-TUNING mode. Both the
active and standby frequencies are set to 120.0 MHz and the
radio tuning set to the FREQUENCY mode of opemtion. When
the MODEAREQUENCY/CHANNEL selector knobs are rctated, the frequency change will be made directly into the active
frequency display.
MODE/I'REQUENCY/CHANNEL
Selector -- ROTATE to directly se-
lect active frequency.
r ) -- PRESS whenever
COMM Transfer Button ( .
return to the FREQUENCY mode of operation.
it
is desired to
sEcTtoN 5
PERFORMANCE
There is no change to the airplane performance when this avionic equipment
inetalled. However, this installation of an externally mounted ant€nna or
several related extemal ani€nnas, will reeult in a minor reduction in cmise
is
Derfolmance.
SUPPLEMENT 28
SofB
1 June 1987
SECTION 9
SUPPLEMENTS
MODEL 406
SUPPLEMENT
KING DME
(Type KN'63)
sEcTloN
1
GENERAL
DME (Tlpe KN-63) is the airborne ."interrogator" portion ofin-a
The Ki.ng
-tu'"tu.
wbich supplies continuous' accurate'-slant range distance
""ui*iion
n""d g"ound shtion t'o an airplane in flight'
ii"-?rii"t'ril^
ri t:t":5d,lt--t*"IH:
lvr selection of the
---- operating
-r '
Except
D^LEP! for
9tr1nnet,.;vhl9)
King DME is capable
navigation receiver frequency sele( Iwitches, the r.r\r
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.4
Linearized : No
Creator : Canon
Modify Date : 2012:04:28 10:23:32+04:00
Producer : CutePDF 3.6 (www.cutepdf.com)
Subject :
Title :
Create Date : 2012:04:28 10:23:32+04:00
Author :
Page Count : 692
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools